Powerflex Drives With Totalforce Control: Installation Instructions

PowerFlex Drives with
TotalFORCE Control
Catalog Numbers 20G, 20J
Installation Instructions Original Instructions

PowerFlex Drives with TotalFORCE Control Installation Instructions
Important User Information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize
themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to
be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use
or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is
prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may
lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may
be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach
dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc
Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL Regulatory requirements
for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

Table of Contents
Preface
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Chapter 1
Product Overview Product Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product Rating Cross-references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Commonly Used Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hardware Installation Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fastener Torque Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Preventative Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Chapter 2
Receiving, Handling, and Storage Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Shipment Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 3
Prepare for Installation CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Location Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Power System Resonance Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Minimum Clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Floor Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Installation Site Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recommended Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chapter 4
Mechanical and Electrical Installation of Products with Corrosive Gas Protection (XT) . . . . . 99
Installation Prepare Floor Mount Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Component Removal Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Remove Protective Touch Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Remove Frame 7 Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Remove Frame 8…15 Power Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Remove Frame 7 LCL Filter Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Remove Frame 8…15 LCL Filter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Place Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Join Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Affix the Enclosures to the Floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Electrical Interconnections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Access the Control Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Main Control Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Hardware Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 3

Table of Contents
Safety Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Managing Fiber-optic Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fiber-optic Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fiber-optic Cable Routing by Frame Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Chapter 5
Power Wiring AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Motor Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Power Cable Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Power Cable Connections—Frames 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Power Cable Connections—Frames 7…15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Recommended Cable Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Power Terminal and Bus Bar Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Shunt Trip Wiring—Frames 5 and 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Input and Output Power Wiring Applications—Frames 13…15 . 218
Customer Supplied Control Bus Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Intermittent Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Short Circuit Current Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Applying and Removing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Input Contactor Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Output Contactor Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Bypass Contactor Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Power Jumper Configuration—Frames 5, 6, and 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Power Jumper Configuration—Frames 8…15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Preface
This manual provides procedures for the mechanical and electrical installation
of PowerFlex® 750-Series products with TotalFORCE® control. This manual
includes the basic steps to transport, position, and join the product enclosures,
to make internal electrical connections, to connect power and the motor, and
to wire basic I/O.
This manual provides instructions for an initial product installation. Assembly

procedures in chapters 1...4 assume that supply power is not connected. Once
the product is connected to a power supply, always verify that system power is
not present before performing any work on the product. See safety-related
practices that are contained in publication NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical
Safety in the Work Place.
This manual is intended for two types of personnel:

• Qualified personnel familiar with handling heavy equipment.
• Qualified electricians or other personnel who have experience with
electrical terminology, equipment, methods, and safety precautions.
The Additional Resources section is a directory of Rockwell Automation

publications that provide detailed drive information from wiring and
grounding recommendations to troubleshooting and repair.
Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information as indicated in the
following table.
Topic Page
Corrosive Gas Protection (XT) code added to catalog number explanation. 10
Normal duty AC input and DC output ratings added to catalog number explanation for bus 13, 14
supplies.
Preventative Maintenance recommendations added. 24
Corrosive Environment Installations section added. 52
Installation of Products with Corrosive Gas Protection (XT) section added. 99
LCL Filter labeling updated. 101, 176
Control Pod HIM Cradle with DPI Connector (XT) section added. 163
New main control circuit board described. 165
Shunt Trip Wiring recommendation for frames 5 and 6 updated. 217

Preface
Notes:

Chapter 1
Product Overview
PowerFlex® 750-Series products with TotalFORCE® control are Architecture

Class AC drives, bus supplies, and common bus inverters. These products are
designed for applications that require harmonic mitigation, regeneration, or
common-bus system configurations. These products provide a broad set of
features and application-specific parameters, and they are ideal for high-
performance applications.
In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series products with

TotalFORCE control as:
• PowerFlex 755T products when referring to the group of drives, bus
supplies, and common bus inverters.
• PowerFlex 755TL drive when referring to the low harmonic drive
product.
• PowerFlex 755TR drive when referring to the regenerative drive
product.
• PowerFlex 755TM drive system when referring to regenerative bus
supply and common bus inverter products.
Product Advisories Read the following precautions before you begin installation of the product.
Qualified Personnel
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with PowerFlex 755T
products and associated machinery should plan or implement the
installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to
comply can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Chapter 1
Personal Safety
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the
bus capacitors has discharged completely before servicing. Remove power
and wait five minutes before you open the enclosure door. Measure the DC
bus voltage at the -DC and +DC TESTPOINT sockets on the front of the power
module (see page 207 for location).
ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when
using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can
cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction. Use speed
command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. DPI™ or SCANport™
host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables.
Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in
this manner.
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop/enable control circuitry includes solid state
components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or
unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exists, an additional hardwired stop
circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary
braking method may be required.
ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage due to
unexpected machine operation exists if the drive is configured to
automatically issue a Start or Run command. Do not use these functions
without considering applicable local, national and international codes,
standards, regulations or industry guidelines.
ATTENTION: A possible hazard of personal injury due to prolonged exposure
to high sound levels. Follow applicable local, national, and international
codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines for hearing protection
when exposed to potentially damaging noise hazards.
Product Safety
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive system can result in
component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application
errors such as an under-sized motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, a
corrosive environment, or excessive surrounding air temperatures can result
in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: This product contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when you
install these assemblies. Component damage can result if ESD control
procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control
procedures, reference any applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION: Configuring an analog input for 0…20 mA operation and
driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage. Verify
proper configuration prior to applying input signals.

Chapter 1
Class 1 Light-emitting Diode Product

ATTENTION: A hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical
transmission equipment. This product emits intense light and invisible
radiation. Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors.
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, the installer must provide

guarding to shield exposed electrical equipment against accidental contact.
Exposed electrical components that carry potentially hazardous voltages are
identified in the PowerFlex 750-Series Product with TotalFORCE Control
Hardware Service Manual, publication 750-TG100. When installing this
equipment, consider the design and placement of guarding to help prevent
personal injury of equipment damage.

Chapter 1
Catalog Number Explanation Catalog number positions 1…7 identify the product type and voltage rating.
1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

A B C D E
A
Drive
Code Type Frames
PowerFlex 755TL Drives 5…10
20G PowerFlex 755TR Drives 5…15
PowerFlex 755TM Common Bus Inverters 8…15
20J PowerFlex 755TM Bus Supplies 6…15
B
Corrosive Gas Protection and Cooling Type
Code Description Frames Firmware
1 Standard Protection, Forced Air 5…15 6.xxx and earlier
E Corrosive Gas Protection (XT), Forced Air 5…15 10.xxx and later
C
Input Type
Code Description Frames
Regenerative and Low Harmonic AFE, 755TR Drives 5…7
6
Regenerative and Low Harmonic AFE, 755TM Bus Supplies 6…7
7 Low Harmonic AFE, 755TL Drives 5…7
D Common Bus with DC Precharge 8…15
E Common Bus without DC Precharge 8…15
Regenerative and Low Harmonic AFE, 755TR Drives 8…15
F
Regenerative and Low Harmonic AFE, 755TM Bus Supplies 8…15
G Low Harmonic AFE, 755TL Drives 8…10
D
Enclosure
Code Description Frames
N IP00, UL Open Type 5…6
3 IP21, UL Type 1; Floor Mount 7…15
4 IP54, UL Type 12; Floor Mount 7…15
E
Voltage Rating
Code Voltage
C 400V AC; 3 PH
D 480V AC; 3 PH
E 600V AC; 3 PH
F 690V AC; 3 PH

Chapter 1
Catalog number positions 8…10 identify the product normal duty rating.
1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

F1…F4
F1 F2
PowerFlex 755T ND Drive Ratings PowerFlex 755T ND Drive Ratings
400V, 50 Hz Input 480V, 60 Hz Input
Code Amps kW Frame Code Amps Hp Frame
015 15.4 7.5 014 14 10
022 22 11 022 22 15
030 30 15 027 27 20
037 37 18.5 034 34 25
043 43 22 5 040 40 30 5
060 60 30 052 52 40
072 72 37 065 65 50
085 85 45 077 77 60
104 104 55 096 96 75
140 140 75 125 125 100
176 170 90 156 156 125
6 6
205 205 110 186 186 150
260 260 132 248 248 200
302 302 160 302 302 250
367 367 200 361 361 300
460 460 250 7 430 430 350 7
540 540 315 505 505 400
585 600 315 617 600 500
302 302 160 302 302 250
367 367 200 361 361 300
460 460 250 430 430 350
540 540 315 505 505 400
8 8
585 585 315 545 545 450
650 650 355 617 617 500
750 750 400 710 710 600
770 770 400 740 740 650
920 920 500 800 800 700
1K0 1040 560 960 960 800
1K1 1112 630 9 1K0 1045 900 9
1K2 1175 710 1K1 1135 1000
1K4 1463 800 1K3 1365 1100
1K6 1590 850 1K4 1420 1250
1K7 1715 1000 10 1K6 1655 1500 10
2K1 2156 1250 2K0 2072 1800
2K8 2849 1650 11 2K6 2738 2400 11
3K5 3542 2000 12 3K4 3404 3000 12
4K2 4235 2200 13 4K0 4070 3600 13
5K6 5621 2920 14 5K4 5402 4800 14
7K0 7007 3640 15 6K7 6734 6000 15

Chapter 1
F3 F4
PowerFlex 755T ND Drive Ratings PowerFlex 755T ND Drive Ratings
Code Amps Hp Frame Code Amps kW Frame
011 11 10 015 15 11
017 17 15 020 20 15
022 22 20 023 23 18.5
027 27 25 030 30 22
5 5
032 32 30 034 34 30
041 41 40 046 46 37
052 52 50 050 50 45
062 62 60 061 61 55
077 77 75 082 82 75
099 99 100 098 98 90
6 6
125 125 125 119 119 110
144 144 150 142 142 132
192 192 200 171 171 160
242 242 250 215 215 200
295 295 300 7 265 265 250 7
355 355 350 330 330 315
395 395 400 370 370 355
242 242 250 215 215 200
295 295 300 265 265 250
355 355 350 330 330 315
8 8
395 395 400 370 370 355
435 435 450 415 415 400
545 545 550 505 505 500
595 580 600 565 565 560
690 690 700 650 650 630
760 760 800 9 735 735 710 9
825 825 900 820 820 800
980 980 1000 920 920 900
1K1 1045 1100 1K0 1030 1000
1K2 1220 1250 10 1K1 1150 1100 10
1K5 1430 1500 1K4 1419 1400
2K0 1946 2000 11 1K8 1865 1800 11
2K4 2420 2500 12 2K3 2318 2300 12
2K9 2998 3100 13 2K7 2778 2750 13
3K9 3979 4100 14 3K6 3687 3650 14
4K9 4960 5100 15 4K5 4596 4550 15

Chapter 1
1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20J 1 F 3 C 1K6 L N A N N N N N -C1-P16…

G1…G4
G1 G2
PowerFlex 755TM ND Bus Supply Ratings PowerFlex 755TM ND Bus Supply Ratings
400V AC, 50 Hz Input 480V AC, 60 Hz Input
580V DC Output 696V DC Output
Code Code
Amps kW Frame Amps kW Frame
Rated AC Input Amps Rated AC Input Amps
140 150 87 125 129 90
176 182 106 156 160 111
6 6
205 220 128 186 191 133
260 279 162 248 255 177
302 324 188 302 311 216
367 394 228 361 371 258
460 494 286 7 430 442 307 7
540 579 336 505 519 361
585 644 373 617 617 429
302 324 188 302 311 216
367 394 228 361 371 258
460 494 286 430 442 307
540 579 336 505 519 361
8 8
585 628 364 545 560 390
650 698 405 617 635 442
750 805 467 710 730 508
770 826 479 740 761 529
920 987 572 800 823 573
1K0 1116 647 960 987 687
1K1 1193 692 9 1K0 1075 748 9
1K2 1261 731 1K1 1167 812
1K4 1570 910 1K3 1404 977
1K6 1697 984 1K4 1460 1016
1K7 1840 1067 10 1K6 1702 1184 10
2K1 2314 1342 2K0 2131 1483
2K8 3057 1772 11 2K6 2816 1959 11
3K5 3801 2204 12 3K4 3501 2436 12
4K2 4546 2634 13 4K0 4186 2912 13
5K6 6030 3496 14 5K4 5555 3865 14
7K0 7517 4358 15 6K7 6925 4818 15

Chapter 1
G3 G4
PowerFlex 755TM ND Bus Supply Ratings PowerFlex 755TM ND Bus Supply Ratings
600V AC, 60 Hz Input 690V AC, 50 Hz Input
870V DC Output 1000V DC Output
Code Code
Amps kW Frame Amps kW Frame
Rated AC Input Amps Rated AC Input Amps
077 79 69 082 84 84
099 102 89 098 101 101
6 6
125 129 112 119 122 122
144 148 129 142 146 146
192 197 171 171 176 176
242 249 217 215 221 221
295 303 263 7 265 272 272 7
355 365 317 330 339 339
395 406 353 370 380 380
242 249 217 215 221 221
295 303 263 265 272 272
355 365 317 330 339 339
8 8
395 406 353 370 380 380
435 447 389 415 426 426
545 560 487 505 518 518
595 596 518 565 580 580
690 710 617 650 667 667
760 782 680 9 735 754 754 9
825 848 737 820 842 842
980 1008 877 920 944 944
1K1 1075 935 1K0 1057 1057
1K2 1255 1091 10 1K1 1180 1180 10
1K5 1471 1279 1K4 1456 1456
2K0 2001 1740 11 1K8 1914 1914 11
2K4 2489 2164 12 2K3 2379 2379 12
2K9 3080 2678 13 2K7 2849 2849 13
3K9 4088 3555 14 3K6 3781 3781 14
4K9 5096 4432 15 4K5 4714 4714 15

Chapter 1
1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20G 1 D 3 F 2K3 M N D N N N N N -C0-C11-P15…

H1…H4
H1 H2
PowerFlex 755T ND CBI Ratings PowerFlex 755T ND CBI Ratings
Code Amps kW Frame Code Amps Hp Frame
302 302 160 302 302 250
367 367 200 361 361 300
460 460 250 430 430 350
540 540 315 505 505 400
8 8
585 585 315 545 545 450
650 650 355 617 617 500
750 750 400 710 710 600
770 770 400 740 740 650
920 920 500 800 800 700
1K0 1040 560 960 960 800
1K1 1112 630 9 1K0 1045 900 9
1K2 1175 710 1K1 1135 1000
1K4 1463 800 1K3 1365 1100
1K6 1590 850 1K4 1420 1250
1K7 1715 1000 10 1K6 1655 1500 10
2K1 2156 1250 2K0 2072 1800
2K8 2849 1650 11 2K6 2738 2400 11
3K5 3542 2000 12 3K4 3404 3000 12
4K2 4235 2200 13 4K0 4070 3600 13
5K6 5621 2920 14 5K4 5402 4800 14
7K0 7007 3640 15 6K7 6734 6000 15
H3 H4
242 242 250 215 215 200
295 295 300 265 265 250
355 355 350 330 330 315
8 8
395 395 400 370 370 355
435 435 450 415 415 400
545 545 550 505 505 500
595 580 600 565 565 560
690 690 700 650 650 630
760 760 800 9 735 735 710 9
825 825 900 820 820 800
980 980 1000 920 920 900
1K1 1045 1100 1K0 1030 1000
1K2 1220 1250 10 1K1 1150 1100 10
1K5 1430 1500 1K4 1419 1400

Chapter 1
H3 H4
2K0 1946 2000 11 1K8 1865 1800 11
2K4 2420 2500 12 2K3 2318 2300 12
2K9 2998 3100 13 2K7 2778 2750 13
3K9 3979 4100 14 3K6 3687 3650 14
4K9 4960 5100 15 4K5 4596 4550 15
Catalog number positions 11…13 identify additional product configuration.

1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

I J K
I
Filtering and CM Cap Configuration
Reflective Wave
Code EMC Filtering (4) PE-A (5) PE-B DR (6) Frames
Filtering
J (1) Yes Installed Removed – No 8…15
K (1) Yes Installed Removed – Yes 8…15
L (2) No Installed Removed Installed No 5…15
M (2) No Installed Removed – Yes 8…15
P (3) Yes Installed Removed – No 7
(1) Does not provide a C2 solution (C3 compliant), but does include some filtering.
(2) C3 compliant without additional filtering.
(3) Filtering with C2 compliance.
(4) EMC C2 ratings, conducted and radiated (IP54) or EMC C2 conducted only (IP21), are provided by ‘P’ filtering option for frame 7;
C2 solutions kits are also available for frames 5, 6, and 8…10.
(5) Configuration does not apply to product type 20G with input types D and E. PE-A jumpers are removed when bus conditioner for
marine applications (-P51) is selected.
(6) The DR jumper only applies to frame 5 and 6 drives.
J
Dynamic Braking (1)
Code Internal Resistor Internal Transistor Frames
N No No 5…15
(1) Not available on Frames 5…15, specify Code ‘N’.
K
Door-mounted HIM (Frames 7…15)
Code Operator Interface and Control Frames
A No HIM with TotalFORCE Control 5…15
D Enhanced LCD, Full Numeric, IP66, NEMA Type 4X/12 with TotalFORCE 7…15
Control

Chapter 1
Catalog number positions 14…18 are not used.

1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…
Power and control options are listed in the unnumbered field to right of
position 18.
1…3 4 5 6 7 8…10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…
20G Control Options Selection

Code Option Frames Input Type
5…12 D, E, F, G, 6, 7
C0 Torque Accuracy Module
13…15 D, E
C11 Single Control Pod (with Control Bay) (1) 8…15 D, E
C12 Dual Control Pods (with Control Bay) (1) 8…15 D, E
(1) When code ‘D’ is selected in position 13, code C11 includes one door-mounted HIM and code C12 includes two door-mounted
HIMs.
20J Control Options Selection

C1 Control Transformer (Internal 240V) (1) 8…15 F
(1) This option only applies to 755TM regenerative and low harmonic bus supplies. If this option is not selected, a 240V AC, single-
phase, neutral grounded external power source must be supplied by the customer.
20G Power Options Selection

P15 Top Cable Exit with wiring bay 8…15 D, E, F, G
P16 Top Cable Entry with wiring bay 10…15 F, G
P17 Top Cable Entry no wiring bay 8…9 F, G
P46 System DC Bus (4700 Amp) 8…10 D, E, F, G
P50 DC Bus Conditioner 8…15 D, E, F, G
P51 DC Bus Conditioner – Marine Applications 8…15 D, E, F, G, 6, 7
P60 Back-to-back configuration 13…15 D, E, F, G
20J Power Options Selection

P16 Top Cable Entry with wiring bay 10…15 F
P17 Top Cable Entry no wiring bay 8…9 F
P46 System DC Bus (4700 Amp) 8…10 F
P50 DC Bus Conditioner 8…15 F
P51 DC Bus Conditioner – Marine Applications 8…15 F

Chapter 1
Product Rating Cross- The nameplate 1 catalog number provides information about the product
enclosure rating, input voltage rating, and normal duty output amp rating.
references
PowerFlex 755TL Drives
Table 1 - PowerFlex 755TL Drive Ratings to Frame Size Cross-references
1 2 Drive Code 1 – Cat. No. Position 6 2 – Cat. No. Positions 7…10

Nameplate 1: Specifications and Custom Catalog Number
representing options installed at factory.
Enclosure Code Input Voltage and ND Amp Rating
See Nameplate 2 (Located behind HIM)
for equivalent base catalog number and separate options N 3 4 400V AC 480V AC 600V AC 690V AC
Cat No: 20GEG 3 D 740 LNANNNNN IP00, IP21, IP54,
Series: A UL Open Type UL Type 1 UL Type 12
400V Class 480V Class
Model Number: PowerFlex 755T
20G 5 — — C015 D014 E011 F015
Power LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx kW xxx/xxx/xxx HP
Input: 3-Phase, 60Hz 20G C022 D022 E017 F020
AC Voltage 400 480
Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx
20G C030 D027 E022 F023
Output: 3-Phase, 47-63Hz
AC Voltage Range 0-400 0-460 20G C037 D034 E027 F030
Base Frequency (default) 50 Hz 60 Hz
Continuous Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx
60 Sec Ovld Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx
20G C043 D040 E032 F034
3 Sec Ovld Amps LD/ND/HD /xxx/xxx /xxx/xxx
20G C060 D052 E041 F046
Control Power: 240V AC, 50/60 Hz, 3.34 A, 0.8kVA
DATE 2019/03/20 Original Firmware: x.xxx 20G C072 D065 E052 F050
Rockwell Automation, 1201 S 2nd St, Milwaukee, WI 53204, USA
PRODUCT OF USA PLANT 1100
Serial Number: xxxxxxxxxx 20G C085 D077 E062 F061
SECTION 1 OF 9 20G C104 D096 — —
See product literature for additional information 20G 6 C140 D125 E077 F082
Nameplate 1 - Drives 20G C176 D156 E099 F098
20G C205 D186 E125 F119
20G C260 D248 E144 F142
20G — 7 7 C302 D302 E192 F171
20G C367 D361 E242 F215
20G C460 D430 E295 F265
20G C540 D505 E355 F330
20G C585 D617 E395 F370
20G 8 8 C302 D302 E242 F215
20G C367 D361 E295 F265
Wall Mount Drives 20G C460 D430 E355 F330
20G C540 D505 E395 F370
20G C585 D545 E435 F415
20G C650 D617 E545 F505
20G C750 D710 — —
20G C770 D740 — —
20G 9 9 C920 D800 E595 F565
20G C1K0 D960 E690 F650
20G C1K1 D1K0 E760 F735
20G C1K2 D1K1 E825 F820
20G C1K4 D1K3 E980 F920
20G 10 10 C1K6 D1K4 E1K1 F1K0
20G C1K7 D1K6 E1K2 F1K1
Floor Mount Drives (Typical) 20G C2K1 D2K0 E1K5 F1K4

Chapter 1
PowerFlex 755TR Drives

Table 2 - PowerFlex 755TR Drive Ratings to Frame Size Cross-references
Nameplate 1: Specifications and Custom Catalog Number
Enclosure Code Input Voltage and ND Amp Rating
for equivalent base catalog number and separate options N 3 4 400V AC 480V AC 600V AC 690V AC
Cat No: 20GEG 3 D 740 LNANNNNN IP00, IP21, IP54,
Series: A UL Open Type UL Type 1 UL Type 12
400V Class 480V Class
Model Number: PowerFlex 755T

20G 5 — — C015 D014 E011 F015
Input: 3-Phase, 60Hz
20G C022 D022 E017 F020
AC Voltage 400 480
Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx
20G C030 D027 E022 F023
Output: 3-Phase, 47-63Hz
AC Voltage Range
Base Frequency (default)
0-400
50 Hz
0-460
60 Hz
20G C037 D034 E027 F030
Continuous Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx
60 Sec Ovld Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx 20G C043 D040 E032 F034
20G C060 D052 E041 F046
DATE 2019/03/20 Original Firmware: x.xxx 20G C072 D065 E052 F050
Rockwell Automation, 1201 S 2nd St, Milwaukee, WI 53204, USA
Serial Number: xxxxxxxxxx 20G C085 D077 E062 F061
SECTION 1 OF 9 20G C104 D096 — —
See product literature for additional information
20G 6 C140 D125 E077 F082
Nameplate 1 - Drives 20G C176 D156 E099 F098
20G C205 D186 E125 F119
20G C260 D248 E144 F142
20G — 7 7 C302 D302 E192 F171
20G C367 D361 E242 F215
20G C460 D430 E295 F265
20G C540 D505 E355 F330
20G C585 D617 E395 F370
20G 8 8 C302 D302 E242 F215
20G C367 D361 E295 F265
Wall Mount Drives 20G C460 D430 E355 F330
20G C540 D505 E395 F370
20G C585 D545 E435 F415
20G C650 D617 E545 F505
20G C750 D710 — —
20G C770 D740 — —
20G 9 9 C920 D800 E595 F565
20G C1K0 D960 E690 F650
20G C1K1 D1K0 E760 F735
20G C1K2 D1K1 E825 F820
20G C1K4 D1K3 E980 F920
20G 10 10 C1K6 D1K4 E1K1 F1K0
20G C1K7 D1K6 E1K2 F1K1
Floor Mount Drives (Typical) 20G C2K1 D2K0 E1K5 F1K4
20G 11 11 C2K8 D2K6 E2K0 F1K8
20G 12 12 C3K5 D3K4 E2K4 F2K3
20G 13 13 C4K2 D4K0 E2K9 F2K7
20G 14 14 C5K4 D5K4 E3K9 F3K6
20G 15 15 C6K7 D6K7 E4K9 F4K5

Chapter 1
PowerFlex 755TM Bus Supplies

Table 3 - Modular AFE Bus Supply Ratings to Frame Size Cross-references
Nameplate 1: Specifications and Custom Catalog Number Enclosure Code Input Voltage and ND Amp Rating
for equivalent base catalog number and separate options
N 3 4 400V AC 480V AC 600V AC 690V AC
Cat No: 20JEF 3 C1K6 LNANNNNN IP00, IP21, IP54,
UL Open Type UL Type 1 UL Type 12
Series: A
Model Number: PowerFlex 755T 400V Class 480V Class 20J 6 — — C140 D125 E077 F082
Power LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx kW xxx/xxx/xxx kW
Input: DC 47-63 Hz 20J C176 D156 E099 F098
AC Voltage 400 480
Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx 20J C205 D186 E125 F119
Output: DC
DC Voltage Range 0-400 0-460 20J C260 D248 E144 F142
Continuous Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx 20J — 7 7 C302 D302 E192 F171
20J C367 D361 E242 F215
Mfd. on 2019/03/20 Original Firmware: x.xxx
20J C460 D430 E295 F265
Rockwell Automation, 1201 S 2nd St, Milwaukee, WI 53204, USA Serial Number: xxxxxxxxxx
20J C540 D505 E355 F330
SECTION 1 OF 9 20J C585 D617 E395 F370

See product literature for additional information 20J 8 8 C302 D302 E242 F215
Nameplate 1 - Bus Supplies 20J C367 D361 E295 F265
20J C460 D430 E355 F330
20J C540 D505 E395 F370
20J C585 D545 E435 F415
20J C650 D617 E545 F505
20J C750 D710 — —
20J C770 D740 — —
20J 9 9 C920 D800 E595 F565
20J C1K0 D960 E690 F650
20J C1K1 D1K0 E760 F735
Wall Mount Bus Supply 20J C1K2 D1K1 E825 F820
20J C1K4 D1K3 E980 F920
20J 10 10 C1K6 D1K4 E1K1 F1K0
20J C1K7 D1K6 E1K2 F1K1
20J C2K1 D2K0 E1K5 F1K4
20J 11 11 C2K8 D2K6 E2K0 F1K8
20J 12 12 C3K5 D3K4 E2K4 F2K3
20J 13 13 C4K2 D4K0 E2K9 F2K7
20J 14 14 C5K6 D5K4 E3K9 F3K6
20J 15 15 C7K0 D6K7- E4K9 F4K5
Floor Mount Bus Supply (Typical)

Chapter 1
PowerFlex 755TM Common Bus Inverters

Table 4 - Modular CBI Ratings to Frame Size Cross-references
Nameplate 1: Specifications and Custom Catalog Number Enclosure Code Input Voltage and ND Amp Rating
for equivalent base catalog number and separate options 3 4 400V AC 480V AC 600V AC 690V AC
Cat No: 20GED 3 F2K3 MNDNNNNN IP21, IP54,
Series: A
UL Type 1 UL Type 12
Model Number: PowerFlex 755T 400V Class 480V Class 20G 8 8 C302 D302 E242 F215
Input: 3-Phase, 60 Hz 20G C367 D361 E295 F265
AC Voltage Range 400 480
Amps LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx xxx/xxx/xxx 20G C460 D430 E355 F330
Output: 3-Phase, 0-400 Hz 0-400 Hz
AC Voltage Range 0-400 0-460 20G C540 D505 E395 F370
Continuous Amps LD/ND/HD
60 Sec Ovld Amps LD/ND/HD
xxx/xxx/xxx
xxx/xxx/xxx
xxx/xxx/xxx
xxx/xxx/xxx
20G C585 D545 E435 F415
20G C650 D617 E545 F505
Mfd. on 2017/04/14 Original Firmware: x.xxx 20G C750 D710 — —
Rockwell Automation, 1201 S 2nd St, Milwaukee, WI 53204, USA Serial Number: xxxxxxxxxx
20G C770 D740 — —
SECTION 1 OF 3 20G 9 9 C920 D800 E595 F565

See product literature for additional information 20G C1K0 D960 E690 F650
Nameplate 1 - Common Bus Inverters 20G C1K1 D1K0 E760 F735
20G C1K2 D1K1 E825 F820
20G C1K4 D1K3 E980 F920
20G 10 10 C1K6 D1K4 E1K1 F1K0
20G C1K7 D1K6 E1K2 F1K1
20G C2K1 D2K0 E1K5 F1K4
20G 11 11 C2K8 D2K6 E2K0 F1K8
20G 12 12 C3K5 D3K4 E2K4 F2K3
20G 13 13 C4K2 D4K0 E2K9 F2K7
20G 14 14 C5K6 D5K4 E3K9 F3K6
20G 15 15 C7K0 D6K7 E4K9 F4K5
Power Bay

Chapter 1
Commonly Used Tools Installation Tools
This list includes the tools that are needed for installation and test
measurements.
IMPORTANT Care must be taken to be sure that tools and/or hardware components do
not fall into open drive assemblies. Do not energize the drive unless all loose
tools and/or hardware components have been removed from the drive
assemblies and enclosure.
Tool Description Details

Allen socket wrench 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm (with long extension)
Allen socket wrench extension 254 mm (10 in.)
Box wrench 7 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 13 mm, 15mm, 17mm, 19 mm, 22 mm
Ratcheting wrench 17 mm
Crimp tools For cable terminals 1.5...240
Current clamp 1000A (AC, rms), signal output
ESD-protected place of work Work surface, floor cover, seat, and ground connections
ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap, shoes, overall clothing (coat)
Flashlight —
Flat-nose screwdriver 3 mm (0.12 in.), 5 mm (0.19 in.), 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)
Fuse puller —
Torx, star, or hexalobular screw #15, #20, #25, #30, #40, #45
driver/bit
Hexagonal socket wrench 2.5 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 13 mm, 17 mm, 18 mm
Insulation tester 1000V DC
Level —
Module service cart The optional module service cart (20-750-MCART1) is recommended to
handle and transport power modules.
Important: The service cart is required to handle and transport LCL filter
modules.
DCPC module lift Used together with the module service cart to remove DC precharge modules.
Module storage hardware Module storage hardware (20-750-MINV-ATIP) helps to stabilize power and
filter modules during temporary storage after removal.
Multi-meter Digital multi-meter, capable of AC and DC voltage, continuity, resistance,
capacitance measurements, and forward diode bias tests. Fluke model 87 III or
equivalent.
Nose pliers —
Oscilloscope Portable, digitizing, dual channel scope, with isolation
Phillips screwdriver/bit #1, #2
Torque wrench 1...12 N•m (8.8…106 lb•in)
Torque wrench 6...50 N•m (53…443 lb•in)
Ratcheting Wrench 1...12 N•m (8.8…106 lb•in)
Wire cutter —

Chapter 1
Configuration Tool Options
Any of the following configuration tools can be used:

• PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S HIM
See the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S HIM (Human
Interface Module) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.
• Connected Components Workbench™ (CCW) software R10.00 or later
• Connected Components Workbench software is the recommended
standalone software tool for use with PowerFlex drives. You can obtain a
free copy by Internet download at the Product Compatibility and
Download Center rok.auto/pcdc.
• Controller configuration software, such as RSLogix 5000® software,
version 20.00 or later, or Studio 5000™ Logix Designer application,
version 21.00 and later.
• Automatic Device Configuration (ADC), an RSLogix 5000 software
feature, which supports the automatic download of configuration data.
The download occurs after the Logix controller establishes an
EtherNet/IP network connection to a PowerFlex 755TL, 755TR, or
755TM product and its associated peripherals.
• A computer connection to the EtherNet/IP™ network.
Hardware Installation The assembly illustrations throughout this manual contain diagrams (as shown
here) that identify the following: corresponding sequence number (if
Diagrams necessary), type of fastener, fastener size, tool type and size, and final assembly
torque.
M4 x 10 mm Fastener Size
1 T20 or F - 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) Tool Type and Size
4.8 N•m (42 lb•in) F Flat-nose screwdriver
Sequence Px Phillips screwdriver/bit and size
Number Final Assembly Torque
PZx Pozidriv screwdriver/bit and size
Txx Torx screwdriver/bit and size
Fastener Type
xx mm Hexagonal socket wrench
Flat-head screw
Hexagonal bolt
Hexagonal nut or standoff
Hexagonal screw
Torx screw
Phillips screw
Pozidriv screw
Slotted torx screw

Chapter 1
Fastener Torque Sequences

ATTENTION: Components can be damaged if initial tightening procedure is
not performed to specification.
The following illustrates initial and final torque sequences for components that
are fastened to a heat sink by using two, four, and six screws. Initial torque is
1/3 (33%) of final torque, except six-point mountings, which require 0.7 N•m
(6 lb•in) initial torque. The numeric illustration labels are for your assistance.
Drive components do not contain these labels.
Figure 1 - Two-point Mounting
1 2
1 2
Initial Sequence
2 1
Final Sequence
Figure 2 - Four-point Mounting

1 3
4 2
1 2 3 4
Initial Sequence
4 3 2 1
Final Sequence
Figure 3 - Six-point Mounting
6 2 4
3 1 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
Initial Sequence
Do not exceed 0.7 N•m (6 lb•in) on initial torque of all six screws.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Final Sequence
Preventative Maintenance To help achieve the highest level of uptime, Rockwell Automation
recommends that you follow a product maintenance schedule for your
operating environment. Predictive maintenance and component replacement
schedules are provided in the PowerFlex 750-Series Products with
TotalFORCE Control Hardware Service Manual, publication 750-TG100.

Chapter 2
Receiving, Handling, and Storage
PowerFlex® 755T wall mount and floor mount products are bolted to wooden
skids for shipment. For ease of handling, Rockwell Automation recommends
leaving the products bolted to the skids until moved to the final installation
area. Floor mount cabinets must remain in an upright position during
handling.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or structural damage, never attempt to

lift or move the product by any means other than the handling methods
outlined in this publication. PowerFlex 755T product cabinets are top- and
front-heavy.
ATTENTION: Exercise caution when moving the product to ensure the
equipment is not scratched, dented, or damaged in any manner. Stabilize the
product during handling to prevent tipping and injury to personnel.
Receiving Standard packaged PowerFlex 755T wall mount products are boxed and
shipped as a whole unit. Standard packaged PowerFlex 755T floor mount
products are shipped upright as a whole unit or in shipping sections as
required. See page 27 for details on shipment configurations. Each unit or
shipping section is bolted to a shipping skid with removable shipping cleats and
is covered with clear plastic wrap. Protection is for upright shipping and is not
waterproof or watertight.
Heavy duty/export packaging is similar to standard packaging, but uses a

plastic wrap suitable for occasional light water-spray. In addition, wood
framing and sheeting surround the unit or shipping section. Heavy duty/
export packaging is not waterproof, watertight, or intended for long-term
storage.
Upon delivery of the PowerFlex 755T product, refer to the packing slip for
sizes and exact shipping weights. The packing slip also lists the items that are
included in the shipment.

Chapter 2
Inspect the shipment for damaged or lost items. If the packaging appears to be
damaged, unpack the equipment for further inspection. Open the doors or
remove covers and inspect the major components for signs of damage.
PowerFlex 755T floor mount enclosures are equipped with a key-operated
door latch. A double-bit door key is taped to the enclosure door.
Figure 4 - Key-operated Door Latch and Key
If there is evidence of damage or loss, follow this procedure:

• Note on the delivery receipt that the equipment being received is
damaged.
• Contact the carrier that made the delivery and schedule an inspection.
• Inform your local Rockwell Automation representative that the
equipment is damaged.
• Retain all product packaging for review by the carrier.
For further assistance, contact your Rockwell Automation representative.

Chapter 2
Shipment Configurations Some PowerFlex 755T floor mount products are divided into sections for
shipment. The approximate weight of each section and the approximate total
weight of the product is listed in the following tables.
When lifting and handling these components, follow all applicable local,
national, and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines
for safe practices.
Approximate Weights
Some products are divided for shipment. The weight of each section and the
total weight are listed in the tables in this section.
Frame 5…7 Drives and Bus Supplies
Frame 5…7 products ship as complete units.
Frame 5 Frame 6 Frame 7
Device Frame Size Approximate Maximum Weight, kg (lb)

755TL drives 5 73 (160)
6 145 (320)
7 567 (1250)
755TR drives 5 73 (160)
6 145 (320)
7 567 (1250)
755TM bus supplies 6 145 (320)
7 454 (1000)

Chapter 2
Shipment Sections Frames 8…12 Drives and Bus Supplies

This diagram illustrates how products are divided for shipment.
Entry Wire Bay Left Section Center Section Right Section Exit Wire Bay
(Optional) (Optional)
Table 5 - Approximate Maximum Unit Weights - Frames 8…12 Drives and Bus Supplies
Device Frame Approximate Maximum Weight, kg (lb)
Size Input and Power Bay with Entry Wire Bay with Exit Wire Bay with Entry and Exit Wire Bay
755TL drives 8 Total: 900 (1984) — Total: 987 (2176) —
9 Total: 1683 (3710) — Total: 1770 (3902) —
10 Left section: 1553 (3423) Left section: 1630 (3593) Left section: 1553 (3423) Left section: 1640 (3616)
Right section: 1370 (3021) Right section: 1370 (3021) Right section: 1457 (3213) Right section: 1457 (3213)
Total: 2923 (6444) Total: 3000 (6614) Total: 3010 (6636) Total: 3097 (6829)
755TR drives 8 Total: 900 (1984) — Total: 987 (2176) —
9 Total: 1683 (3710) — Total: 1770 (3902) —
11 Left section: 1642 (3621) Wire bay: 242 (533) Wire bay: 242 (533) Each wire bay: 242 (533)
Right section: 2018 (4449) Left section: 1642 (3621) Left section: 1642 (3621) Left section: 1642 (3621)
Total: 3660 (8070) Right section: 2018 (4449) Right section: 2018 (4449) Right section: 2018 (4449)
Total: 3902 (8603) Total: 3902 (8603) Total: 4144 (9136)
12 Left section: 1642 (3621) Wire bay: 242 (533) Wire bay: 242 (533) Each wire bay: 242 (533)
Center section: 1419 (3128) Left section: 1642 (3621) Left section: 1642 (3621) Left section: 1642 (3621)
Right section: 1363 (3004) Center section: 1419 (3128) Center section: 1419 (3128) Center section: 1419 (3128)
Total: 4424 (9753) Right section: 1363 (3004) Right section: 1363 (3004) Right section: 1363 (3004)
Total: 4666 (10286) Total: 4666 (10286) Total: 4908 (10819)
755TM bus 8 Total: 709 (1563) — — —
supplies 9 Total: 1180 (2601) — — —
10 Total: 2106 (4643) Wire bay: 126 (278) — —
Right section: 2106 (4643)
Total: 2232 (4921)
11 Left section: 1642 (3621) Wire bay: 242 (533) — —
Right section: 889 (1959) Left section: 1642 (3621)
Total: 2531 (5580) Right section: 889 (1959)
Total: 2773 (6113)
12 Left section: 1642 (3621) Wire bay: 242 (533) — —
Total: 3327 (7336)
Typical Final Configurations
Frame 12 Drive with Optional Wire Bays Frame 12 Bus Supply

Chapter 2
Shipment Sections Frame 13 Drives

Control Pod
Entry Wire Bays Left-to-Right Orientation Left-to-Right Orientation Exit Wire Bays
(Back-to-Back) Left Section Right Section (In-Line)
Balance Bays Right-to-Left Orientation Right-to-Left Orientation Entry Wire Bays

Approximate Maximum Weights - Frame 13 Drives

Back-to-Back Configuration In-Line Configuration
Description Weight Section No. Description Weight Section No.
755TR drives 13 Left-to-right orientation Left-to-right orientation
Left section: 1553 (3423) 2 of 6 Left section: 1553 (3423) 5 of 7
Right section: 1370 (3021) 3 of 6 Right section: 1370 (3021) 6 of 7
Right-to-left orientation Right-to-left orientation
Right section: 1553(3423) 5 of 6 Right section: 1553 (3423) 3 of 7
Wire bays Wire bays
Fiber routing and entry wire bays: 291 (642) 1 of 6 Entry wire bays: 252 (556) 4 of 7
DC voltage balance and exit wire bays: 291 (642) 6 of 6 Left exit wire bay: 126 (278) 1 of 7
Total: 6428 (14,172) Right exit wire bay: 126 (278) 7 of 7
Total: 6350 (14,000)
5 of 6
Final In-Line Configuration
4 of 6
1 of 7
1 of 6
2 of 7
2 of 6
3 of 7
3 of 6
4 of 7
6 of 6
5 of 7
Final Back-to-Back Configuration
6 of 7
7 of 7

Chapter 2

Control Pod
Entry Wire Bays Left-to-Right Orientation Left-to-Right Orientation Exit Wire Bays


Right section: 1642(3621) 5 of 6 Right section: 1642 (3621) 3 of 7
Wire bays Wire bays
Total: 8288 (18,272)
5 of 6
4 of 6
1 of 7
1 of 6
2 of 7
2 of 6
3 of 6 3 of 7
4 of 7
6 of 6
Final Back-to-Back Configuration 5 of 7
6 of 7
7 of 7

Chapter 2

Control Pod
Entry Wire Bays Left-to-Right Orientation Left-to-Right Orientation Left-to-Right Orientation Exit Wire Bays
(Back-to-Back) Left Section Center Section Right Section (In-Line)
Balance Bays Right-to-Left Orientation Right-to-Left Orientation Right-to-Left Orientation Entry Wire Bays
(Back-to-Back) Left Section Center Section Right Section (In-Line)

Center section: 1419 (3128) 3 of 8 Center section: 1419 (3128) 7 of 9
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry wire bays: 523 (1154) 1 of 8 Entry wire bays: 484 (1066) 5 of 9
Total: 9816 (21,638)
5 of 8
6 of 8
7 of 8
1 of 9
1 of 8
2 of 9
2 of 8 3 of 9
3 of 8
4 of 9
4 of 8
8 of 8 5 of 9
6 of 9
7 of 9
8 of 9
9 of 9

Chapter 2
Shipment Sections Frame 13 Bus Supplies

Control Pod
Entry Wire Bays Left-to-Right Orientation

(Back-to-Back) Center Section
Balance Bays Right-to-Left Orientation Entry Wire Bays

(Back-to-Back) Center Section (In-Line)
Approximate Maximum Weights - Frame 13 Bus Supplies

755TM bus supplies 13 Left-to-right orientation Left-to-right orientation
Wire bays Wire bays
Fiber routing and entry wire bays: 252 (556) 1 of 4 Fiber routing and entry wire bays: 252 (556) 2 of 3
DC voltage balance bays: 252 (556) 4 of 4 Total: 4464 (9842)
Total: 4716 (10,398)
3 of 4 Final In-Line Configuration
1 of 4
3 of 3
2 of 4
2 of 3
4 of 4
1 of 3

Chapter 2

Control Pod
Entry Wire Bays Left-to-Right Orientation Left-to-Right Orientation

(Back-to-Back) Left Section Right Section
DC Voltage Balance Bays Right-to-Left Orientation Right-to-Left Orientation Entry Wire Bays

Description Weight Qty. Description Weight Qty.
Right Section: 889 (1959) 3 of 6 Right section: 889 (1959) 5 of 5
Wire bays Wire bays
DC voltage balance bays: 252 (556) 6 of 6 Total: 5546 (12,226)
Total: 5798 (12,782)
4 of 6
1 of 6 1 of 5
2 of 5
2 of 6
3 of 6 3 of 5
6 of 6
5 of 5

Chapter 2

Control Pod
Entry Wire Bays Left-to-Right Orientation Left-to-Right Orientation

(Back-to-Back) Left Section Right Section


Right Section: 1443 (3182) 3 of 6 Right section: 1443 (3182) 5 of 5
Wire bays Wire bays
DC voltage balance bays: 252 (556) 6 of 6 Total: 6654 (14,672)
Total: 6906 (15,228)

4 of 6
1 of 6 1 of 5
2 of 6 2 of 5
3 of 6 3 of 5
6 of 6
5 of 5

Chapter 2
Shipment Sections Frame 8…15 Common Bus Inverters

This diagram illustrates how products are divided for shipment. Frame 15 is
shown. Frame 8…12 common bus inverters ship as one in-line section.
Left-to-Right Orientation Right-to-Left Orientation Exit Wire Bays

Section Section (Back-to-Back)
Approximate Maximum Unit Weights - Frame 8…12 Common Bus Inverters
Device Frame Size Approximate Maximum Weight kg (lb)
Power Bay with Control Bay with Exit Wire Bay with Control and Exit
Wire Bay
755TM common bus 8 374 (825) 455 (1004) 477 (1052) 588 (1231)
inverters
9 611 (1348) 692 (1527) 714 (1575) 796 (1754)
10 873 (1924) 954 (2103) 954 (2103) 1057 (2331)
11 1284 (2830) 1365 (3009) 1503 (3313) 1584 (3492)
12 1580 (3483) 1542 (3400) 1799 (3966) 1880 (4145)
Approximate Maximum Weights - Frame 13…15 Common Bus Inverters
Back-to-Back Configuration
Description Weight Section No.
755TM common bus 13 Left-to-right orientation 2 of 3
inverters Section: 954 (2103) 1 of 3
Right-to-left orientation
Section: 954 (2103) 2 of 3
Wire bays
Fiber routing, DC voltage balance, and exit wire bays: 291 (642) 3 of 3
Total: 2199 (4848)
1 of 3
3 of 3
14 Left-to-right orientation 2 of 3
Section: 1365 (3009) 1 of 3
Section: 1365 (3009) 2 of 3
Wire bays
Total: 3253 (7172) 1 of 3
3 of 3
15 Left-to-right orientation 2 of 3
Section: 1542 (3400) 1 of 3
Section: 1542 (3400) 2 of 3
Wire bays
Total: 3607 (7954) 1 of 3
3 of 3

Chapter 2
Approximate Maximum Component Weights

Table 6 - Power Modules
Description Cat. No. Max Module Weight, Max Weight with
kg (lb) Packaging, kg (lb)
Power module 20-750-MI4-xnnnxnnn 113 (250) 164 (362)
(frame 7 only)
Power module 20-750-MI1-xnnnxnnn 142 (312) 192 (424)
20-750-MI1-xnnnxnnnC (1)
Power module with a 20-750-MI2-xnnnxnnn
paralleling inductor 20-750-MI2-xnnnxnnnC (1)
Power module with a 20-750-MI3-xnnnxnnn
reflected wave filter 20-750-MI3-xnnnxnnnC (1)
(1) Copper
Table 7 - LCL Filter Modules

Voltage Amps Cat. No. Max Module Max Weight with
(normal duty) Weight, kg (lb) Packaging, kg (lb)
400 600 20-750-ML4-C585D617 175 (385) 226 (497)
(frame 7 only)
480 600
600 395 20-750-ML4-E395F370
(frame 7 only)
690 370
400 540 20-750-ML1-C540D505 213 (470) 264 (582)
480 505
400 770 20-750-ML1-C770D740
480 740
600 395 20-750-ML1-E395F370
690 370
600 545 20-750-ML1-E545F505
690 505
400 1100 20-750-ML1-C1K1D1K0 322 (710) 373 (822)
480 1000
400 1400 20-750-ML1-C1K4D1K3
480 1300
600 760 20-750-ML1-E760F735
690 735
600 980 20-750-ML1-E980F920
690 920
Table 8 - Precharge Modules

Unit Frame Size Max Module Weight, kg (lb) Max Weight with Packaging, kg (lb)
(1)
AC precharge 8 41 (90) 71 (157)
9 132 (291) 173 (381)
(2)
DC precharge 8…15 41 (90) 44 (97)
(1) Includes AC precharge module catalog numbers: 20-750-MACP-xx-xnx.
(2) Includes DC precharge module catalog numbers: 20-750-MDCP1-xx-xnx and 20-750-MDCP2-xx-xnx.

Chapter 2
Approximate Maximum Entry and Exit Wiring Bay Weights

Bay Width mm (in.) Maximum Weight kg (lb) Maximum Ship Weight kg (lb)
400 (15.7) 102 (225) 129 (285)
800 (31.5) 242 (535) 309 (682)
Approximate Maximum IP54, UL Type 12 Roof Fan Assembly Weights

Bay Width mm (in.) Maximum Weight kg (lb) Maximum Ship Weight kg (lb)
400 (15.7) 25 (55) 30 (66)
600 (23.6) 25 (55) 32 (71)
800 (31.5) 50 (110) 57 (126)
Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights

Table 9 - Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights - Frame 5…12 Drives and Bus Supplies
Device Frame Size Approximate Maximum Ship Weight, kg (lb)
Input and Power Bay with Entry Wire Bay with Exit Wire Bay with Entry and Exit Wire Bay
755TL Drives 5 Total: 105 (231) — — —
6 Total: 186 (410) — — —
7 Total: 660 (1455) — — —
8 Total: 993 (2189) — Total: 1113 (2454) —
9 Total: 1817 (4006) — Total: 1928 (4251) —
755TR Drives 5 Total: 105 (231) — — —
6 Total: 186 (410) — — —
7 Total: 660 (1455) — — —
8 Total: 993 (2189) — Total: 1113 (2454) —
9 Total: 1817 (4006) — Total: 1928 (4251) —
11 Left section: 1786 (3937) Wire bay: 309 (681) Left section: 1786 (3937) Entry wire bay: 309 (681)
Right section: 2166 (4775) Left section: 1786 (3937) Right section: 2166 (4775) Left section: 1786 (3937)
Total: 3952 (8712) Right section: 2166 (4775) Exit wire bay: 309 (681) Right section: 2166 (4775)
Total: 4261 (9393) Total: 4261 (9393) Exit wire bay: 309 (681)
Total: 4570 (10,074)
12 Left section: 1786 (3937) Wire bay: 309 (681) Left section: 1786 (3937) Entry wire bay: 309 (681)
Center section: 1541 (3397) Left section: 1786 (3937) Center section: 1541 (3397) Left section: 1786 (3937)
Right section: 1485 (3274) Center section: 1541 (3397) Right section: 1485 (3274) Center section: 1541 (3397)
Total: 4812 (10,608) Right section: 1485 (3274) Wire bay: 309 (681) Right section: 1485 (3274)
Total: 5121 (11,289) Total: 5121 (11,289) Exit wire bay: 309 (681)
Total: 5430 (11,970)

Chapter 2
Table 9 - Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights - Frame 5…12 Drives and Bus Supplies (Continued)
Input and Power Bay with Entry Wire Bay with Exit Wire Bay with Entry and Exit Wire Bay
755TM Bus 6 Total: 186 (410) — — —
Supplies
7 Total: 527 (1164) — — —
8 Total: 782 (1724) — — —
9 Total: 1277 (2815) — — —
10 Total: 2264 (4991) Entry wire bay: 185 (408) — —
Right section: 2264 (4991)
Total: 2449 (5399)
11 Left section: 1772 (3907) Entry wire bay: 309 (681) — —
Total: 3037 (6696)
12 Left section: 1772 (3907) Entry wire bay: 309 (681) — —
Total: 3621 (7983)
Table 10 - Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights - Frame 13…15 Drives and Bus Supplies
755TR Drives 13 Left-to-right orientation Left-to-right orientation
Left section: 1836 (4048) Left section: 1836 (4048)
Right section: 1533 (3380) Right section: 1533 (3380)
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry: 376 (829) Entry: 376 (829)
Exit: 376 (829) Left exit: 188 (414)
Total: 7490 (16,513) Right exit: 188 (414)
Total: 7490 (16,513)
14 Left-to-right orientation Left-to-right orientation
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry: 608 (1340) Entry: 608 (1340)
Exit: 608 (1340) Left exit: 312 (688)
Total: 9448 (20,829) Right exit: 312 (688)
Total: 9464 (20,865)
Center section: 1607 (3543) Center section: 1607 (3543)
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry: 608 (1340) Entry: 608 (1340)
Exit: 608 (1340) Left exit: 312 (688)
Total: 11,204 (24,701) Right exit: 312 (688)
Total: 11,220 (24,736)

Chapter 2
Table 10 - Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights - Frame 13…15 Drives and Bus Supplies (Continued)
755TM Bus 13 Left-to-right orientation Left-to-right orientation
Supplies Center section: 2350 (5181) Center section: 2350 (5181)
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry: 337 (743) Entry: 322 (710)
Balance: 337 (743) Total: 5,022 (11,072)
Total: 5374 (11,848)
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry: 569 (1254) Entry: 617 (1360)
Balance: 337 (743) Total: 6321 (13,935)
Total: 6610 (14,573)
Wire bays Wire bays
Entry: 569 (1254) Entry: 617 (1360)
Exit/Balance: 337 (743) Total: 7551 (16,647)
Total: 7840 (17,284)
Table 11 - Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights - Frame 8…12 Common Bus Inverters
Power Bay with Control Bay with Exit Wire Bay with Control and Exit
Wire Bay
755TM 8 433 (955) 520 (1146) 544 (1199) 679 (1497)
Common Bus
Inverters 9 674 (1486) 761 (1678) 803 (1770) 891 (1964)
10 940 (2072) 1045 (2304) 1047 (2308) 1156 (2549)
11 1377 (3036) 1464 (3228) 1637 (3609) 1738 (3832)
12 1677 (3697) 1789 (3944) 1951 (4301) 2040 (4497)

Chapter 2
Table 12 - Approximate Maximum Shipping Weights - Frame 13…15 Common Bus Inverters
Back-to-Back Configuration
755TM 13 Left-to-right orientation
Common Bus Section: 1104 (2434)
Inverters Right-to-left orientation
Section: 1104 (2434)
Wire bays
Exit/Balance: 376 (829)
Total: 2584 (5697)
14 Left-to-right orientation
Section: 1530 (3373)
Section: 1530 (3373)
Wire bays
Total: 3668 (8087)
15 Left-to-right orientation
Section: 1766 (3893)
Section: 1766 (3893)
Wire bays
Total: 4140 (9127)

Chapter 2
Handling Two methods of handling PowerFlex 755T cabinet mount products within the
receiving facility are acceptable.
• Transport by lift truck
• Overhead lifting (crane or hoist)
PowerFlex 755T cabinet mount products must be handled in the upright

vertical position. Failure to comply with this requirement can lead to internal
component and enclosure damage.
ATTENTION: Follow local codes and guidelines and your company safety
procedures when you handle PowerFlex 755T products.
To avoid personal injury and structural damage to the PowerFlex 755T product,
do not lift or move the equipment by any means other than what is described in
this publication. PowerFlex 755T products are top- and front-heavy.
The following guidelines are provided to help avoid personal injury and
equipment damage during handling and to help stabilize the product during
transport to the installation site.
• Keep the product bolted to the shipping skid to minimize possibility of
tipping.
• The factory-installed structural angles must remain secured to the
enclosure during handling. Structural angles provide lift points and help
minimize flexing of the enclosure during handling.
• Handle the PowerFlex 755T product carefully to avoid damage to the
enclosures and paint.
• Keep the product in an upright position. PowerFlex 755T products,
frame 7 and larger, are not to be tipped or laid flat during handling.
Before moving the product, verify that the route is clear of all obstructions and
that other workers are a safe distance away.

Chapter 2
Transport by Lift Truck
PowerFlex 755T cabinet mount products are bolted to shipping skids that
facilitate transport by a lift truck. If you are using a lift truck, refer to the
following procedure.
ATTENTION: Verify that the lift truck can handle the weight and size of the
PowerFlex 755T product safely. Shipment weights can be found on the
packing slip that is included with each shipment. Approximate weights are
listed on page 27.
1. Lift only from underneath the shipping skid. Position the PowerFlex
755T product on the forks so that the load is balanced and does not tilt.
PowerFlex 755T products are top- and front-heavy.
2. Keep the load against the load backrest of the lift truck. Use a belt to
secure the PowerFlex 755T product to the lift truck. Tilt the load a few
degrees backward toward the lift truck mast.
IMPORTANT The use of a belt is to help prevent the load from slipping forward
during a sudden stop. Do not excessively tighten the belt. Belt
tension must not bend, buckle, or otherwise distort the enclosure.
3. Start and stop the lift truck gradually and slowly to avoid jerky
movements. When traveling with the load, drive slowly with the forks
carried as low as possible, consistent with safe operation.
Figure 5 - Use a Lift Truck to Transport a PowerFlex 755T Enclosure

Structural Angles
Carriage and Mast
Belt the enclosure to

the carriage before
lifting and moving.
Shipping Skid
Lift only from underneath the shipping skid. Load Backrest

Chapter 2
Overhead Lifting (Crane or Hoist)
All lifting equipment and components (hooks, bolts, lifts, slings, chains, and so
forth) must be properly sized and rated to lift and hold the weight of the
equipment safely. Shipment weights can be found on the packing slip that is
included with each shipment. Approximate weights are listed on page 27.
Structural angles with lifting holes are affixed to the top of the product
enclosures.
ATTENTION: To guard against possible personal injury and/or equipment

damage:
• Inspect all lifting hardware for proper attachment before lifting the
equipment.
• Do not allow any part of the equipment or lifting mechanism to contact
electrically charged conductors or components.
• Do not subject the equipment to high rates of acceleration or deceleration
while transporting to the installation site or when lifting.
• Do not allow personnel or their limbs directly underneath the equipment
when it is being lifted and mounted.
Attach Lifting Hardware to Frames 5 and 6
Rig the lifting hardware according to the following diagrams.
Figure 6 - Chassis Lifting Points and Rigging - Frames 5 and 6
<45°
>173 mm
(6.8 in.)
344 mm
(13.5 in.)
(x4)
Ø 15.9 mm
(0.6 in.)

Chapter 2
Attach Lifting Hardware to Cabinets
1. Attach rigging to overhead crane, hoist, or similar lifting device.

2. Do not pass straps or cables through the lifting holes in the structural
angle. Use slings with load-rated hooks or shackles.
3. Adjust the rigging lengths to compensate for any unequal weight
distribution of the load and support the PowerFlex 755T product in an
upright position.
4. To reduce tension on the rigging and compression on the structural
angle, verify that the angle between the straps or cables and horizontal
plane is greater than 60°.
Figure 7 - Cabinet Lifting Points and Rigging - Frames 7…15
B>A
≥60˚
A
Ø 40 mm
(1.4 in.)

Chapter 2
Storage PowerFlex 755T products are wrapped in plastic to help prevent dirt and dust
from entering the enclosure during shipment. If you must store the equipment
after you receive it, take the following precautions.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 755T products are designed for indoor applications

and do not have sufficient packaging for outdoor storage. Store PowerFlex
755T products in a heated building that offers adequate air circulation and
protection from dirt and moisture.
• Do not remove the protective plastic wrap.

• Do not store the product outdoors.
• Do not store the product in an area where it is exposed to a corrosive
atmosphere.
• Store the product in an area that is clean and dry.
• Store the product in a conditioned building with adequate air
circulation.
• Maintain a storage temperature of -40…+70 °C (-40…+158 °F).
• Maintain a relative humidity of 5…95% non-condensing.
• Heating and moisture protection devices must be used if the rate of
change in relative humidity and/or ambient temperature can lead to
condensation on the stored equipment.
• If the product is stored for a long time, reform the bus capacitors before
use. For instructions on how to reform the bus capacitors, visit
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support.

Chapter 2
Notes:

Chapter 3
Prepare for Installation
CE Conformity Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive and Electromagnetic

Compatibility Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European
Norm (EN) standards, which are referenced by the Official Journal of the
European Union. PowerFlex® 755T products comply with the EN standards
that are listed in this section when installed according to these installation
instructions.
EU Declarations of Conformity are available online at:

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/overview.page
Low Voltage Directive (LVD)

• EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-
1: Safety requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy.
EMC Directive
• EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3:
EMC product standard including specific test methods.
General Considerations
• For EU compliance, drives must satisfy installation requirements that
are related to both EN 61800-5-1 and EN 61800-3 provided in this
document.
• PowerFlex 755T products comply with the EMC requirements of EN
61800-3 when installed according to good EMC practices and the
instructions that are provided in this document. However, many factors
can influence the EMC compliance of an entire machine or installation,
and compliance of the drive itself does not ensure compliance of end
user applications.
• PowerFlex 755T products are not intended to be used on public low-
voltage networks that supply domestic premises. Without additional
mitigation, radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a
network. The installer is responsible to take measures such as
supplementary line filters and enclosures to prevent interference, and the
installation requirements of this document.
• Requirements for supplementary mitigation that is related to specific
high-frequency emission limits are provided in Table 13.

Chapter 3
• PowerFlex 755T products generate harmonic current emissions on the

AC supply system. When operated on a public low-voltage network it is
the responsibility of the installer or user to ensure that applicable
requirements of the distribution network operator have been met.
Consultation with the network operator and Rockwell Automation can
be necessary.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 755T products produce DC current in the

protective earthing conductor which can reduce the ability of RCDs
(residual current-operated protective devices) or RCMs (residual
current-operated monitoring devices) of type A or AC to provide
protection for other equipment in the installation. Where an RCD or
RCM is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only an
RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this product.
Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-5-1 and the Low

Voltage Directive
• Voltage classes up to 690V PowerFlex 755T products are compliant with
the CE LVD when used on a ‘corner-earthed’ supply system and all
other common grounded supply systems for altitudes up to and
including 2000 m (6562 ft).
• When used at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft) up to a maximum of
4800 m (15,748 ft), PowerFlex 755T products of voltage classes up to
480V cannot be powered from a ‘corner-earthed’ supply system to
maintain compliance with the CE LVD. Altitude derating curves are
provided in the PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE
Control Technical Data, publication 750-TD100.
• Drives that are provided in the IP54, UL Type 12 enclosure are
compliant with the CE LVD when installed in pollution degree 1…4
environments where no gaseous contaminants are present. All other
enclosure types must be installed in a pollution degree 1 or 2
environment to be compliant with the CE LVD. Characteristics of the
different pollution degree ratings are provided in the PowerFlex 750-
Series Products with TotalFORCE Control Technical Data, publication
750-TD100.
• PowerFlex 755T products produce leakage current in the protective
earthing conductor that exceeds 3.5 mA AC and/or 10 mA DC. The
minimum size of the protective earthing (grounding) conductor that is
used in the application must comply with local safety regulations for
high-protective earthing conductor current equipment.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 755T products produce DC current in the

protective earthing conductor which can reduce the ability of RCDs
(residual current-operated protective devices) or RCMs (residual
current-operated monitoring devices) of type A or AC to provide
protection for other equipment in the installation. Where an RCD or
RCM is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only an
RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this product.

Chapter 3
Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-3 and the EMC

Directive
• The drive must be earthed (grounded) as described in Chapter 5.
• Output power wiring to the motor must employ cable with a braided
shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be housed
in metal conduit, or equivalent shielding must be provided. Continuous
shielding must be provided from the drive enclosure to the motor
enclosure. Both ends of the motor cable shield (or conduit) must
terminate with a low-impedance connection to earth. At the drive end of
the motor cable, terminate the shield at the PE Grounding Bar. (See
Grounding Requirements starting on page 196.)
• At the motor end, the motor cable shield or conduit must terminate in a
shielded connector which must be properly installed in an earthed
motor wiring box that is attached to the motor. The motor-wiring box
cover must be installed and earthed.
• All control (I/O) and signal wiring to the drive must use cable with a
braided shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be
housed in metal conduit, or equivalent shielding must be provided.
When shielded cable is used, the cable shield is terminated with a low-
impedance connection to earth at only one end of the cable, preferably
the end where the receiver is located. When the cable shield is
terminated at the drive end, it can be terminated either by using a
shielded connector with a conduit plate or conduit box, or the shield
can be clamped to an ‘EMC plate.’
• Motor cables must be separated from control and signal wiring wherever
possible.
• Maximum motor-cable length must not exceed the maximum length
that is indicated in Table 13 for compliance with radio-frequency
emission limits for the specific standard and installation environment.
• The drive must be powered from an earthed supply system such as a TN
or TT system and the PE-A and PE-B jumpers in the drive must be
correctly configured (see Power Jumper Configuration—Frames 5, 6,
and 7 on page 252 or Power Jumper Configuration—Frames 8…15 on
page 261).
• Verify that appropriate system design or filtering is used so that fault
number 14118 ‘CapOvrResonance’ does not occur during standard
operation. See Power System Resonance Conditions on page 53.

Chapter 3
Table 13 - PowerFlex 755T Input Product RF Emission Compliance and Installation

Requirements
Drive Frame and Catalog EN61800-3 Category C3 EN61800-3 Category C2
Number I > 100 A EN61000-6-4 Category CISPR11
Group 1 Class A
(Input Power ≤ 20 kVA)
Frame 5 - AC input product EN61800-3 Category C2 for
20G1xxC015…20G1xxC104 conducted and radiated emissions is
20G1xxD014…20G1xxD096 available for frame 5 drives.
Requires 20-750-EMC2-F5 EMC C2
filter kit.
20G1xxD125…20G1xxD248 available for frame 6 drives and bus
supplies.
Requires 20-750-EMC2-F6 EMC C2
filter kit.
20G1xxD302…20G1xxD617 available for frame 7 drives and bus
supplies. Requires Filtering selection
P. IP21 drives only provide
conducted emissions. IP54 drives
provide conducted and radiated
emissions.
Frame 8 - AC input product
20G1xxC302…20G1xxC770
20G1xxD302…20G1xxD740
150 m (492 ft) motor cable limit.(1)
20G1xxC920…20G1xxC1K4
20G1xxD800…20G1xxD1K3
20G1xxC1K6…20G1xxC2K1
20G1xxD1K4…20G1xxD2K0
EN61800-3 Category C2 for
20G1xxC2K8 conducted emissions is available for
20G1xxD2K6 frame 8…15 drives and bus
Frame 12 - AC input product supplies.
20G1xxC3K5 Requires an 20-750-MEMCC2-Fn
EMC C2 filter kit.
20G1xxD3K4
20G1xxC4K2
20G1xxD4K0
20G1xxC5K6
20G1xxD5K4
20G1xxC7K0
20G1xxD6K7
(1) Intended to be powered from an industrial power network that is supplied by a dedicated power transformer or generator and
not from low voltage power lines that supply other customers.

Chapter 3
Location Planning Consider the following when planning the location for your PowerFlex 755T
product.
• Environment - temperature, humidity, and vibration or shock
• Ventilation and air conditioning
• Input power cable entry points
• Motor cable exit points
• Product dimensions (See page 66 for Approximate Dimensions.)
• Overall height of installation area
• Alignment with other equipment
• Future needs
Mounting Surface - Wall Mount Products

Install wall mount products on a flat vertical surface.
• Install the product in a vertical orientation.
• Verify that the product makes full contact with the mounting surface.
• Do not use standoffs or spacers.
Mounting Surface - Floor Mount Products
Install floor mount products on a flat and level surface such that all enclosures
in the line-up are within ±0.25 mm (0.010 in.) vertical orientation. If
necessary, use metal shims to level the enclosures before joining them.
• Install product enclosures in an upright orientation.
• Verify that the product enclosures are square, vertical, and stable.
• Verify that filters and debris screens are installed.
Various mounting options are acceptable.

• Corner base/plinth system (See page 61)
• Structural steel system (See page 62)
• Anchor bolt system (See page 63)
• Concrete screw system (See page 63)

Chapter 3
Environment
The installation site must be compatible with the degree of protection that is
provided by the enclosure.
• PowerFlex 755T products are only intended for indoor use.
• Protect the equipment from moisture and direct sunlight.
• Protect fans and electronics by avoiding dust or metallic particles.
Surrounding air temperature IP00, UL Open Type: -20…+40 °C (-4…+104 °F) Frames 5 and 6, all ratings
Ambient temperature IP20, UL Type 1: -20…+40 °C (-4…+104 °F) Frames 5 and 6, all ratings
IP21, UL Type 1: -20…+40 °C (-4…+104 °F) Frames 7…15, all ratings
IP54, UL Type 12: -20…+40 °C (-4…+104 °F) Frames 7…15, all ratings
Ambient temperature with 50 °C (122 °F) or 60 °C (140 °F) Frames 5 and 6, all ratings
derating 50 °C (122 °F) or 55 °C (134 °F) Frames 7…15, all ratings
See Derating Guidelines in the PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE
Control, publication 750-TD100.
Storage temperature -40…+70 °C (-40…+158 °F)
Relative humidity 5…95% non-condensing
Atmospheric protection Harsh environment is defined as a copper or silver reactivity level greater than 1000
angstroms per 30 days exposure.
No condensation allowed.
See ISA-71.04-2013 for details on how to measure reactivity levels on copper and
silver test coupons.
Corrosive Environment Installations
The following requirements must be met for PowerFlex 755T product

installations in environments where corrosive gases are prevalent.
• The PowerFlex 755T product must be manufactured with corrosive gas
protection (XT) features that provide protection against contamination
and corrosion.
• All fiber-optic transceivers and printed circuit board edge connectors are
coated with dielectric grease.
• Apply dielectric grease to option card edge connectors before
installation in the control pod. See the Hardware Service Manual,
publication 750-TG100 for instructions on application of dielectric
grease and maintaining dielectric grease connections.
• All unused wire harness connectors, circuit board connectors, terminal
bocks, and fiber-optic transceivers and ports are sealed with protective
covers.

Chapter 3
Seismic Qualified Installations
In a seismic qualified installation, PowerFlex 755T products must be rigidly

mounted according to local standards and codes. In addition, the installation
must comply with any guidance that is provided by a qualified Structural
Professional Engineer.
Installation instructions for the seismic hardware that is required begins on

page 154.
Power System Resonance Power system harmonics and system resonance conditions present challenges
for industrial electrical systems with non-linear loads (for example, diode
Conditions rectifiers, thyristor phase-controlled front-end converters, and so forth).
Capacitive and inductive filters on a shared AC power source interact with
source harmonics to create resonant current flows. This condition causes
component stress, excess heating, and can result in reduced product life.
Because the interaction of each load must be considered, system resonance
conditions are challenging to predict.
For detailed information about power system resonance conditions and

mitigation techniques, see Knowledgebase Answer ID 1093310.
PowerFlex 755T Resonance Detection Capabilities
PowerFlex 755T active front-end products monitor for line-side resonance

currents. Detection is a key to help prevent unexpected power system
resonance failures.
When system resonance is detected, PowerFlex 755T active front end drives
and bus supplies continue operation and provide an early-warning of line-side
resonance through alarm 14117 ‘CapHighResonance’.
When power system resonance levels surpass thresholds for reliable operation,
14118 ‘CapOverResonance’ provides a fault. You have the option to configure
the desired response to a system over resonance condition using parameter
0:453 [CapOvrRsncActn]. See the PowerFlex Drives with TotalFORCE
Control Programming Manual, publication 750-PM100 for more information.
Energy Pause Mode
If line-side resonance occurs while the line side converter is not modulating,
commonly connected equipment is likely the cause. The energy pause feature is
a useful way to disconnect the line side converter from the AC source when
converter modulation is not required. Additionally, the energy pause feature
shuts down peripheral devices to save energy during standby periods.

Chapter 3
Minimum Clearances Specified vertical clearance requirements that are indicated in Figure 8 and
Figure 9 are intended to be from the drive to the closest object that can restrict
airflow through the drive heat sink and chassis. The drive must be mounted in
a vertical orientation as shown and must make full contact with the mounting
surface. Do not use standoffs or spacers.
Figure 8 - Mounting Clearances for Frame 5 Wall Mount

Frame 5 Frame 5 with 20-750-CBOX1-F5 Mounting Surface
IP00, UL Open Type IP20, UL Type 1 (See page 51)
150 mm (5.9 in.)

150 mm (5.9 in.)
150 mm (5.9 in.)
Airflow through the heat

150 mm (5.9 in.) sink must not be
impeded.
Figure 9 - Mounting Clearances for Frame 6 Wall Mount

Frame 6 Frame 6 with 20-750-CBOX1-F6 Mounting Surface
IP00, UL Open Type IP20, UL Type 1 (See page 51)
150 mm (5.9 in.)

150 mm (5.9 in.)
150 mm (5.9 in.)

Airflow through the heat
sink must not be
150 mm (5.9 in.) impeded.

Chapter 3
The overhead clearance requirements that are indicated in Figure 10 allow

access to the exhaust hoods and cooling fan housings.
Figure 10 - Mounting Clearances for Floor Mount Frame 7
250 mm (9.8 in.)
200 mm (7.9 in.)
IP21, UL Type 1 IP54, UL Type 12

Chapter 3
The overhead clearance requirements that are indicated in Figure 11 allow

access to the exhaust hoods and cooling fan housings.
Figure 11 - Mounting Clearances for Floor Mount Frames 8…15
250 mm (9.8 in.)
200 mm (7.9 in.)

Chapter 3
Airflow through the enclosure must not be impeded. Regular inspection and
replacement of the filter media is required to maintain proper cooling. See the
PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE Control Hardware Service
Manual, publication 750-TG100 for filter media maintenance schedules.
Figure 12 - Airflow Clearances for Floor Mount Frame 7
Airflow through cabinets must not be impeded.

Chapter 3
Figure 13 - Airflow Clearances for Floor Mount Frames 8…15
Airflow through cabinets must not be impeded.

Chapter 3
PowerFlex 755T products can be mounted on a service pad or platform. The

platform height and enclosure setback measurements that are indicated in
Figure 14 are the maximum that is allowed for by the PowerFlex 750-Series
service cart (20-750-MCART1). The platform height measurement is also an
installation limit per NEC requirements for the disconnect switch.
Figure 14 - Mounting Clearances for Enclosure Access (Frames 7…15)
Side View Side View
Maximum Enclosure Setback

Maximum Platform or
Plinth System Height 203 mm
(8 in.)
254 mm
(10 in.)
No clearance is required between the back of the enclosure and a wall. Minimum Aisle Width
914 mm
(36 in.)
Side View Top View
152 mm
20-750-MCART1 (6 in.)
This clearance is required for the cart
when the end enclosure is a power bay.

Chapter 3
Floor Mounting Options Several mounting options are covered in this section. In all instances, each
enclosure has a mounting hole in each corner. All mounting holes must be used
to secure the enclosure properly. Remove the debris plug when using mounting
hardware that must pass through the mounting hole.
Figure 15 - Typical Enclosure Mounting Holes
Debris Plug
Four Enclosure Mounting Holes
Mounting hole locations for product type are provided in the approximate
dimension drawings starting on page 66.

Chapter 3
Rittal Corner Base/Plinth System
Rittal Flex-Block base/plinth systems are available from Rittal Corporation in

100 mm (4.0 in.) and 200 mm (8.0 in.) heights. Systems provide a base/plinth
for each corner of a Rittal TS 8 enclosure and are secured by using an M12
screw in each corner. Follow the installation instructions for the product.
Figure 16 - Rittal Corner Base/Plinth Mounting
Corner Piece
Trim Panel
Table 14 - Rittal Flex-Block Base/Plinth System Components

Component Name Height mm (in.) Width and Depth mm (in.) Rittal Model No.
Corner pieces 100 (4.0) — 8100.000
200 (8.0) — 8200.000
Trim panels (optional) 100 (4.0) 300 (11.8) 8100.300
400 (15.7) 8100.400
600 (23.6) (1) 8100.600
800 (31.5) 8100.800
1000 (39.4) 8100.010
200 (8.0) 300 (11.8) 8200.300
400 (15.7) 8200.400
600 (23.6) (1) 8200.600
800 (31.5) 8200.800
1000 (39.4) 8200.010
(1) All PowerFlex 755T floor mount enclosures are 600 mm (23.6 in.) deep.

Chapter 3
Structural Steel System
Enclosures can be mounted to structural steel that is anchored to concrete and

meet the following specifications and minimum dimensions.
• Material: ASTM A-36 / ASME SA36, or equivalent
Figure 17 - Structural Steel Beam Cross-sections

Wide Flange Beam Channel Beam
tf
d tw d tw
b b
Table 15 - Steel Beam Dimensions

Style Depth (d) Width (b) Thickness (tw) Flange (tf)
mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
Wide Flange Beam 100 (4.0) 100 (4.0) 7.6 (0.3) 10.2 (0.4)
Channel Beam 100 (4.0) 43 (1.7) 7.6 (0.3) 7.6 (0.3)
Structural Steel Mounting Configurations

Enclosures can be mounted directly to structural steel beams by using M12-
1.75 screws threaded into the threaded corner holes. The enclosures must be
secured to the anchor bolts in all four corners by using M12 nuts and lock
washers. Secure the steel beam to the concrete floor by using M12 (0.5 in.)
anchor bolts.
Figure 18 - Structural Steel Mounting Cross-section
Debris Plug
M12 Bolt
Lock Washer
M12 Nut
M12
Anchor Bolt

Chapter 3
Anchor Bolt System
Enclosures can be mounted directly to a level concrete surface by using M10

(0.375 in.) anchor bolts.
The enclosures must be secured to the anchor bolts in all four corners by using
M10 nuts and lock washers.
Figure 19 - Anchor Bolt System Cross-section
44 mm
(1.73 in.)
M10
(0.375 in.)
Concrete Screw System
Enclosures can be mounted directly to a level concrete surface by using M10

(0.375 in.) concrete screws.
The enclosures must be secured by the concrete screws in all four corners.
Figure 20 - Concrete Screw System Cross-section
44 mm
(1.73 in.)
M10
(0.375 in.)

Chapter 3
Installation Site Figure 21 - Cross-section View of Cable Bottom Entry and Exit
Requirements
Front Rear
Mounting Hardware (See page 65)
Mounting Surface (See page 51)
Conduit
Bottom Recommended Gland or Conduit Hole Pattern.

(Power Bay) Use the locations marked on the plate.
See Approximate Dimensions on page 66.
Figure 22 - Mount on Level Surface
Mounting Surface
Install the product on a flat and level surface such that all enclosures in the line-
up are with ±0.25 mm (0.010 in.) vertical orientation.

Chapter 3
Recommended Mounting Frame Size Fastener Size Usage Notes

Hardware Frame 5 M8 (5/16 in.) Use four-bolt mounting pattern. —
Frame 6 M8 (3/8 in.) Use four-bolt mounting pattern. —
Frames 7…15 M12 (0.5 in.) Threads into the cabinet mounting ho15le.
• Corner base/plinth system
• Structural steel system Property Class 8.8 or better
Frames 7…15 M10 (0.375 in.) Passes through the cabinet mounting hole. (Grade 5 or better)
• Anchor bolt system
• Concrete screw system

Chapter 3
Approximate Dimensions The following table lists the dimensional drawings that are provided in this
section.
Table 16 - Dimensional Drawing Index
Product Description Page
755TL and 755TR Drives Frame 5 Drives Front and Bottom Views 67
Frame 6 Drives Front and Bottom Views 68
Frame 7 Drives Top, Front, and Bottom Views 69
Frame 13…15 Drives Top and Front Views 75
Frame 13 Drives Bottom Views 76
Drives Optional Entry and Exit Wire Bays Top, Front, and Bottom Views 79
755TM Bus Supplies Frame 6 Bus Supplies Top, Front, Bottom, and Side Views 80
Frame 7 Bus Supplies Top, Front, Bottom, and Side Views 81
Frame 13…15 Bus Supplies Top and Front Views 87
Optional Entry Wire Bays Top, Front, and Bottom Views 88
755TM Common Bus Frame 8 Common Bus Inverters Top, Front, and Bottom Views 89
Inverters
Frame 9 Common Bus Inverters Top, Front, and Bottom Views 90
Control Bay and Optional Exit Wire Bays Top, Front, and Bottom Views 97

Chapter 3
PowerFlex 755TL and 755TR Drives Approximate Dimensions

Frame 5 Drives Front and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.).
IP00, UL Open Type Grounding Plate Option Conduit Box (1) and Debris Hood Kit (2)
300
(11.8)
8.5
10 (0.3)
(0.4)
16
(0.6)
863 187 863 915

(34.0) (7.4) (34.0) (36.0)
840
(33.1)
863
(34.0)
469
(18.5)
8.5
(0.3)
12
(0.5)
151 125
0 (0)
22 (0.9)
322 (12.7)
344 (13.5)
(5.9) (4.9) 212

(8.3)
0 (0)
33 (1.3)
142 (5.6)
247 (9.7)
311 (12.2)
93 (3.7)
70 (2.8)
32 (1.3)
0 (0)
312 (12.3)
344 (13.5)
42 (1.7)
0 (0)
102 (4.0)
148 (5.8)
195 (7.7)
244 (9.6)
357 (14.1)
0 (0)
125 (4.9)
172 (6.8)
218 (8.6)
270 (10.6)
5x: Ø3.2
299 (11.8) (Ø0.13)
357 (14.0)
335 (13.1)
209 (7.8) 293 (11.5)
357 (14.1)
316 (13.0) 255 (10.0)
229 (9.0)
216 (8.5)
209 (7.8)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
169 (6.7)
247 (9.7)
103 (4.1)
0 (0)
(1) The optional marine discharge kit includes a conduit box and debris hood.
(2) The SK-RM-CBOX1-F5 kit contains a conduit box and debris hood. Install the conduit box to meet the IP20 enclosure rating.
Install the conduit box and debris hood to meet the UL Type 1 enclosure rating.

Chapter 3
Frame 6 Drives Front and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.).
IP00, UL Open Type Grounding Plate Option Conduit Box and Debris Hood Kit (1)
300
(11.8) 10
12 (0.4)
(0.47)
20
(0.8)
276
(10.8)
1674
(65.9)
1657
(65.2)
1035 1657 1657
1632 (40.7) (65.2) (65.2)
(64.2)
Location of optional 20-HIM-C6S
Human Interface Module
293
(11.5)
571
(22.5)
10
13 (0.4)
(0.51)
36
(1.4)
0 (0)
53 (2.1)
353 (13.9)
405 (16.0)
202
(8.0)
0 (0)
92.5 (1.8)
312.5 (3.5)
73
(2.9)
7x: Ø3.2
432 (17.0) (Ø0.13)
385 (15.2)
361 (14.2) 358 (14.1)
53.4 (2.1)
320 (12.6)
0 (0)
233 (9.2)
198.4 (7.8)
0 (0)
47 (1.8)
88 (3.5)
129 (5.1)
275 (10.8)
316 (12.4)
357 (14.0)
361 (14.2) 0 (0) 0 (0)

330 (13.0)
0 (0)
103 (4.0)
270 (10.6)
303 (11.9)
335 (13.2)
199 (7.8)
0 (0)

Chapter 3
Frame 7 Drives Top, Front, and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
363
Input Power Cables - Top Entry 324 (14.3)
(12.8)
IP54, UL Type 12 531

721 (20.9)
(28.4) 459
IP21, UL Type 1 (18.1)
676
(26.6)
338
(13.3) 175
(6.9)
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1616
(63.6)
1252
(49.3)
800
(31.5)
Mounting Holes
709
(27.9) 535
153 (21.1)
(6.0)
0 (0)
68 (2.7)
164 (6.5)
268 (105.0)
368 (10.6)
472 (18.6)
564 (22.2)
672 (26.5)
735 (28.9)
105 150 36
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)
Input Power Cables and Motor Cables - Bottom Entry and Exit
(Plate is marked with recommended gland or conduit hole pattern.)

Chapter 3
See page 79 for optional exit wire bay dimensions.
312
(12.3) Input Power Cables - Top Entry
128
(5.0)
301
(11.9) IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
90 IP21, UL Type 1
(3.5) 676
(26.6)
Signal Cables - Top Entry
Dimensions same as bottom.
48
(1.9)
Input Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1407
(55.4)
400 800
(15.7) 1206 (31.5)
(47.5)
200
Signal Cables - Bottom Entry (7.9) Mounting Holes
45
(1.8)
709
(27.9) 535
153 (21.1)
451 (6.0)
(17.8)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry 49 105 150 36

0 (0)
335 (13.2)
400 (15.7)
867.5 (34.2)
967.5 (38.1)
1067.5 (42.0)
1135 (44.7)
(1.9) (4.1) (5.9) (1.4)
Motor Cables - Bottom Exit


Chapter 3
512 Input Power Cables - Top Entry

(20.2)
128
(5.0)
301
(11.9) IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
90 IP21, UL Type 1
(3.5) 676
(26.6)
66
(2.6)
Input Bay Power Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1495
(58.9)
600 800 600

(23.6) 2006 (31.5) (23.6)
200 (79.0)
45
(1.8)

(Plate is marked with 509
225 (20.0) 535
(8.9) recommended gland or (21.1)
153
431 conduit hole pattern.) (6.0)
(17.0)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry 105 150 36

0 (0)
535 (2.1)
600 (23.6)
1335 (52.6)
1400 (55.1)
1468 (57.8)
1568 (61.7)
1668 (65.7)
1768 (69.6)
1868 (73.5)
1935 (76.2)
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)

Chapter 3
See page 79 for optional entry and exit wire bay dimensions.
IP54, UL Type 12
473 721
(18.6) (28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
45
(1.8) 726 200
(28.6) (7.9) Control Cables - Top Entry
Input Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1481
(58.3)
1000 800 600 800

(39.4) (31.5) 3206 (23.6) (31.5)
200 230 200 (126.6)
(7.9) (9.1) (7.9)
45
(1.8)
Mounting Holes
709
186 Signal Cables - Bottom Entry (27.9) 535
(7.3) 153 (21.1)
450 (6.0)
(17.7)
105 150 36
0 (0)
1000 (39.4)
935 (36.8)
1000 (39.4)
1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.9)
2335 (91.9)
2400 (94.5)
2468 (97.2)
2564 (100.9)
2668 (105.0)
2768 (109.0)
2872 (113.1)
2964 (116.7)
3072 (120.9)
3135 (123.4)
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry Motor Cables - Bottom Exit

(Plate is marked with recommended
gland or conduit hole pattern.)

Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
473 721
(18.6) (28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
45
(1.8) 726 200
(28.6) (7.9) Signal Cables - Top Entry
Input Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1481
(58.3)
1000 800 800 600 600

(39.4) (31.5) (23.6) (23.6) (23.6)
3806
200 230 200 (149.8)
(7.9) (9.1) (7.9)
45
(1.8)
Mounting Holes
509 509
186 Control Cables - Bottom Entry (20.0) (20.0)
(7.3) 153 153 535
450 (6.0) (6.0) (21.1)
(17.7)
0 (0)
935 (36.8)
1000 (39.4)
1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.9)
2535 (99.8)
2600 (102.4)
2668 (105.0)
2768 (109.0)
2868 (112.9)
2968 (116.9)
3068 (120.8)
3135 (123.4)
3200 (126.0)
3268 (128.7)
3368 (132.6)
3468 (136.5)
3568 (140.5)
3668 (144.4)
3735 (147.0)
105 150 36
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)
Power Cables - Bottom Entry Motor Cables - Bottom Exit

(Plate is marked with recommended gland
or conduit hole pattern.)

74
IP54, UL Type 12
473 721
Chapter 3
(18.6) (28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
45
(1.8) 726 200
Input Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay
See page 79 for optional entry and exit wire bay dimensions.
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1481
(58.3)
Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

1000 800 800 600 800 600
(39.4) (31.5) (31.5) 4606 (23.6) (31.5) (23.6)
200 230 200 (181.3)
(7.9) (9.1) (7.9)
45
(1.8)
Mounting Holes
Control Cables - Top Entry 709 509
186 (27.9) (20.0)
(7.3) 153 153 535
450 (6.0) (6.0) (21.1)
(17.7)
105 150 36
0 (0)
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)
935 (36.8)
1000 (39.4)
1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.9)
2535 (99.8)
2600 (102.4)
3200 (126.0)
3268 (128.7)
3368 (132.6)
3468 (136.5)
3568 (140.5)
3668 (144.4)
3768 (148.3)
3868 (152.3)
3935 (154.9)
3135 (123.4)
4000 (157.5)
4068 (160.2)
4168 (164.1)
4268 (168.0)
4368 (172.0)
4468 (175.9)
4535 (178.5)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Exit

Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry (Plate is marked with recommended gland or conduit hole pattern.)
Chapter 3
Frame 13…15 Drives Top and Front Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
Back-to-back Configuration
In-Line Configuration
A
Frame 13 Shown

Frame IP21, UL Type 1 IP54, UL Type 12 IP21, UL Type 1 IP54, UL Type 12
A B C A B C A B C A B C
13 4000 (157.4) 2132 (83.9) 1352 (53.2) 4000 (157.4) 2291 (90.2) 1442 (56.8) 8000 (314.8) 2132 (83.9) 676 (26.6) 8000 (314.8) 2291 (90.2) 721 (28.4)
14 5400 (212.6) 2132 (83.9) 1352 (53.2) 5400 (212.6) 2291 (90.2) 1442 (56.8) 10,800 (425.2) 2132 (83.9) 676 (26.6) 10,800 (425.2) 2291 (90.2) 721 (28.4)
15 6200 (244.1) 2132 (83.9) 1352 (53.2) 6200 (244.1) 2291 (90.2) 1442 (56.8) 12,400 (488.2) 2132 (83.9) 676 (26.6) 12,400 (488.2) 2291 (90.2) 721 (28.4)

76
113 (4.4)
65 (2.6)
Chapter 3
0 (0) 4002 (157.6) 0 (0)

48 (1.9) 3954 (155.7) 48 (1.9)
288 (11.3) 3714 (146.2) 288 (11.3)

335 (13.2) 3666 (144.4) 335 (13.2)
400 (15.7) 3601 (141.8) 400 (15.7)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry

2866 (112.9)
Signal Cables - Bottom Entry

2801(110.3)
Frame 13 Drives Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
Entry wire bays joined at factory for In-Line configuration.

1335 (52.3) 1335 (52.3)
1400 (55.1) 1400 (55.1)
2266 (89.3)
2201 (86.7)
2135 (84.0) 2135 (84.0)
2200 (86.6) 2200 (86.6)
1466 (57.8)
1401 (55.2)
2735 (107.6) 2735 (107.6)

2800 (110.2) 2800 (110.2)
3535 (139.1) 466 (18.4) 3535 (139.1)

3600 (141.7) 401 (15.8) 3600 (141.7)
3648 (143.6) 353 (13.9) 3648 (143.6)
240
240
(9.4)
(9.4)
Holes
Holes
440
440

(17.3)
(17.3)
Mounting
Mounting
3888 (153.0)
113 (4.4) 3888 (153.0)

3936 (155.0) 65 (2.6) 3936 (155.0)
0 (0)
36
535
535
535
48 (1.9)
(1.4)
(21.1)
(21.1)
(21.1)
72 (2.8)
113 (4.4)
65 (2.6)
0 (0) 5400 (212.6) 0 (0)
48 (1.9) 5353 (210.7) 48 (1.9)
688 (27.1) 4713 (185.6) 688 (27.1)
735 (28.6) 4665 (183.7) 735 (28.9)
800 (31.2) 4600 (181.1) 800 (31.5)

4065 (160.0)
4000 (157.5)
1735 (68.0) 1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.6) 1800 (70.9)
3465(136.4)
3400 (133.9)
2535 (99.5) 2535 (99.8)
2600 (102.1) 2600 (102.4)
2665 (105.0)
2600 (102.4)
3335 (131.0) Back-to-back Configuration 3335 (131.3)

3400 (133.6) 3400 (133.9)
1865 (73.5)
1800 (70.9)
3935 (154.6) 3935 (155.0)
4000 (157.5) 4000 (157.5)

4535 (178.5) 865 (34.1) 4535 (178.5)
4600 (181.1) 800 (31.5) 4600 (181.1)
4648 (183.0) 753 (29.6) 4648 (183.0)
440
440
(17.3)
(17.3)
640
640
(25.2)
(25.2)

Holes
Holes
Mounting
Mounting
5288 (208.2) 113 (4.4) 5288 (208.2)
5336 (210.1) 65 (2.6) 5336 (210.1)
0 (0)
48 (1.9)
36
535
535
535
(1.4)
(21.1)
(21.1)
(21.1)
72 (2.8)
Chapter 3
113 (4.4)
65 (2.6)
0 (0) 6200 (244.1) 0 (0)
48 (1.9) 6153 (242.2) 48 (1.9)
688 (27.1) 5513 (217.0) 688 (27.1)
735 (28.6) 5465 (215.2) 735 (28.9)
800 (31.2) 5400 (212.6) 800 (31.5)
4865 (191.6)
4800 (189.0)
1735 (68.0) 1735 (68.3)

1800 (70.6) 1800 (70.9)
4065 (160.1)
4000 (157.5)
2535 (99.5) 2535 (99.8)
2600 (102.1) 2600 (102.4)
3465 (136.5)
3400 (133.9)
3335 (131.0) 3335 (131.3)
3400 (133.6) 3400 (133.9)
2665 (105.0)
2600 (102.4)
3935 (154.6) 3935 (155.0)
4000 (157.2) 4000 (157.5)
1865 (73.5)
1800 (70.9)
4735 (186.1) 4735 (186.4)
4800 (187.7) 4800 (189.0)

5335 (208.7) 865 (34.1) 5335 (210.0)
5400 (211.3) 800 (31.5) 5400 (212.6)
5448 (214.5) 753 (29.6) 5448 (214.5)
440
440
(17.3)
(17.3)
640
640
(25.2)
(25.2)

Holes
Holes
Mounting
Mounting
6088 (240.0) 113 (4.4) 6088 (240.0)
6135 (240.2) 65 (2.6) 6135 (241.5)
0 (0)
36
535
535
535
48 (1.9)
(1.4)
(21.1)
(21.1)
(21.1)
72 (2.8)
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Drives Optional Entry and Exit Wire Bays Top, Front, and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
Input Power Cables - Top Entry 305 305 305

(12.0) (12.0) (12.0)
Motor Cables - Top Exit
183 183
(7.2) (7.2)
Input Power Cables - Top Entry
Motor Cables - Top Exit
310 676 310 676
(12.2) (26.6) (12.2) (26.6)
400 800
(15.7) (31.5)
2132 2132
(83.9) (83.9)
240 640 Mounting

(9.4) Mounting Holes (25.2)
Holes
440 Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry 440

(17.3) Motor Cables - Bottom Exit (17.3)
535 535
(21.1) (21.1)
A B 36 A B 36
(1.4) (1.4)
Entry Bay – 400 (15.7) Wide Exit Bay – 400 (15.7) Wide Entry Bay – 800 (31.5) Wide Exit Bay – 800 (31.5) Wide
Frame
A B A B A B A B
8 — — 1200 (47.2) 1535 (60.4) — — — —
9 — — 2000 (78.7) 2335 (91.9) — — — —
10 400 (15.7) 65 (2.6) 3200 (126.0) 3535 (139.2) — — — —
11 — — — — 800 (31.5) 65 (2.6) 3800 (149.6) 4535 (178.5)
12 — — — — 800 (31.5) 65 (2.6) 4600 (181.1) 5335 (210.0)

Chapter 3
PowerFlex 755TM Bus Supplies Approximate Dimensions

Frame 6 Bus Supplies Top, Front, Bottom, and Side Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
See page 88 for optional entry wire bay dimensions.
IP00, UL Open Type Grounding Plate Option Conduit Box and Debris Hood Kit (1)
300
(11.8) 10
12 (0.4)
(0.47)
20
(0.8)
276
(10.8)
1674
(65.9)
1657
(65.2)
1035 1657 1657
1632 (40.7) (65.2) (65.2)
(64.2)
Location of optional 20-HIM-C6S
Human Interface Module
293
(11.5)
571
(22.5)
10
13 (0.4)
(0.51)
36
(1.4)
0 (0)
53 (2.1)
353 (13.9)
405 (16.0)
202
(8.0)
0 (0)
92.5 (1.8)
312.5 (3.5)
73
(2.9)
7x: Ø3.2
432 (17.0) (Ø0.13)
385 (15.2)
361 (14.2) 358 (14.1)
53.4 (2.1)
320 (12.6)
0 (0)
233 (9.2)
198.4 (7.8)
0 (0)
47 (1.8)
88 (3.5)
129 (5.1)
129 (5.1)
170 (6.7)
361 (14.2) 0 (0) 0 (0)

330 (13.0)
0 (0)
103 (4.0)
270 (10.6)
303 (11.9)
335 (13.2)
199 (7.8)
0 (0)

Chapter 3
363
Input Power Cables - Top Entry 324 (14.3)
(12.8)
IP54, UL Type 12 531

721 (20.9)
(28.4) 459
IP21, UL Type 1 (18.1)
676
(26.6)
338
(13.3) 175
(6.9)
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1616
(63.6)
1252
(49.3)
800
(31.5)
Mounting Holes
709
(27.9) 535
153 (21.1)
(6.0)
0 (0)
68 (2.7)
164 (6.5)
268 (105.0)
368 (10.6)
735 (28.9)
105 150 36
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)


Chapter 3

(12.3)
128
(5.0)
301
(11.9) IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
90 IP21, UL Type 1
(3.5) 676
(26.6)
48
(1.9)
Input Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1407
(55.4)
400 600
(15.7) 1006 (23.6)
200 (39.6)
45
(1.8)
103 535
(4.1) (21.1)
431
(17.0)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry 36

0 (0)
335 (13.2)
400 (15.8)
935 (36.8)
(1.4)

Chapter 3

(20.2)
128
(5.0)
301
(11.9) IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
90 IP21, UL Type 1
(3.5) 676
(26.6)
66
(2.6)
Input Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1495
(58.9)
600 800
(23.6) 1406 (31.5)
200 (55.4)
Signal Cables - Bottom Entry Mounting Holes
(7.9)
45
(1.8)
225 535
(8.9) (21.1)
451
(17.8)
Input Power Cables - Bottom Entry 36

400 (15.7)
1135 (44.7)
0 (0)
535 (2.1)
(1.4)

Chapter 3
Frame 10 Bus Supplies Top, Front, and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
IP54, UL Type 12
473 721
(18.6) (28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
45
(1.8) 726 200
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1481
(58.3)
1000 800 600

(39.4) 2406 (31.5) (23.6)
200 230 200 (94.7)
(7.9) (9.1) (7.9) Mounting Holes
45
(1.8)
186 Signal Cables - Bottom Entry 535

(7.3) (21.1)
450
(17.7)
83 36
0 (0)
935 (36.8)
1000 (39.4)
1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.9)
2335 (91.9)
(3.3) (1.4)

Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
473 721
(18.6) (28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
45
(1.8) 726 200
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1481
(58.3)
1000 800 800

(39.4) (31.5) 2606 (31.5)
200 230 200 (102.6)
(7.9) (9.1) (7.9) Mounting Holes
45
(1.8)

(7.3) (21.1)
450
(17.7)
36
0 (0)
1000 (39.4)
935 (36.8)
1000 (39.4)
1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.9)
2535 (99.8)
(1.4)

Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
473 721
(18.6) (28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
45
(1.8) 726 200
Input Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1481
(58.3)
1000 800 800 600

(39.4) (31.5) 3206 (31.5) (23.6)
200 230 200 (126.6)
(7.9) (9.1) (7.9) Mounting
45 Holes
(1.8)

(7.3) (21.1)
450
(17.7)
83 36
0 (0)
935 (36.8)
1000 (39.4)
1735 (68.3)
1800 (70.9)
2535 (99.8)
2600 (102.4)
3135 (123.4)
(3.3) (1.4)

Chapter 3
Frame 13…15 Bus Supplies Top and Front Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
A
Frame 13 Shown

Frame IP21, UL Type 1 IP54, UL Type 12 IP21, UL Type 1 IP54, UL Type 12
A B C A B C A B C A B C
13 3200 (125.9) 2132 (83.9) 1352 (53.2) 3200 (125.9) 2291 (90.2) 1442 (56.8) 5600 (220.4) 2132 (83.9) 676 (26.6) 5600 (220.4) 2291 (90.2) 721 (28.4)
14 3800 (149.6) 2132 (83.9) 1352 (53.2) 3800 (149.6) 2291 (90.2) 1442 (56.8) 6,800 (267.8) 2132 (83.9) 676 (26.6) 6,800 (267.8) 2291 (90.2) 721 (28.4)
15 4400 (173.2) 2132 (83.9) 1352 (53.2) 4400 (173.2) 2291 (90.2) 1442 (56.8) 8000 (315.0) 2132 (83.9) 676 (26.6) 8000 (315.0) 2291 (90.2) 721 (28.4)

Chapter 3
Optional Entry Wire Bays Top, Front, and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
Power Cables - Top Entry 305 305 305

(12.0) (12.0) (12.0)
183 183
(7.2) (7.2)
Power Cables - Top Entry
310 676 310 676
(12.2) (26.6) (12.2) (26.6)
400 800
(15.7) (31.5)
2132 2132
(83.9) (83.9)
240 Mounting 640 Mounting

(9.4) (25.2)
Holes Holes
440 Power Cables - Bottom Entry 440

(17.3) (17.3)
535 535
Power Cables - Bottom Entry (21.1) (21.1)
A B 36 A B 36
(1.4) (1.4)
Entry Bay – 400 (15.7) Wide Entry Bay – 800 (31) Wide
Frame
A B A B
8 — — — —
9 — — — —
10 400 (15.7) 65 (2.6) — —
11 — — 800 (31.5) 65 (2.6)
12 — — 800 (31.5) 65 (2.6)

Chapter 3
PowerFlex 755TM Common Bus Inverters Approximate Dimensions

Frame 8 Common Bus Inverters Top, Front, and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
Control Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
1661 (83.9)
(65.4)
400 400 700

(15.7) (15.7) (27.6)
Adjacent enclosure Adjacent enclosure and control bay

Mounting Holes
535
(21.1)
68 (2.7)
164 (6.5)
268 (10.6)
65 (2.6)
65 (2.6)
368 (14.5)
464 (18.3)
568 (22.4)
0 (0)
335 (13.2)
0 (0)
335 (13.2)
0 (0)
235 (9.3)
300 (11.8)
635 (25.0)
105 150 36
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)
(Plate is marked with recommended gland or conduit holepattern.)

Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
1661 (83.9)
(65.4)
600 600 900

(23.6) (23.6) (35.4)

Mounting Holes
535
(21.1)
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
235 (9.3)
0 (0)
68 (2.7)
168 (6.6)
268 (10.6)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
535 (21.0)
535 (21.0)
300 (11.8)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
568 (22.4)
668 (26.3)
768 (30.2)
835 (32.9)
105 150 36
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)


Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1661
(65.4)
800 800 1100

(31.5) (31.5) (43.3)
Mounting Holes
535
(21.1)
235 (9.3)
65 (2.6)
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
0 (0)
68 (2.7)
168 (6.6)
268 (10.6)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
568 (22.4)
668 (26.3)
735 (28.9)
0 (0)
735 (28.9)
300 (11.8)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
568 (22.4)
668 (26.3)
768 (30.2)
868 (34.2)
968 (38.1)
1035 (40.7)
105 150 36
(4.1) (5.9) (1.4)


Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
Power Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
1661 2132
(65.4) (83.9)
Adjacent enclosure
1200
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
535 (2.1)
600 (23.6)
1135 (44.7)
(47.2)
Adjacent enclosure and control bay

Mounting Holes 1500
(59.0)
535
(21.1)
105
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
235 (9.3)
0 (0)
68 (2.7)
168 (6.6)
268 (10.6)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
535 (2.1)
600 (23.6)
668 (26.3)
768 (30.2)
868 (34.2)
968 (38.1)
1068 (42.0)
1135 (44.7)
300 (11.8)
368 (2.7)
468 (6.6)
568 (10.6)
668 (14.5)
768 (18.4)
835 (32.9)
900 (35.4)
968 (38.1)
1068 (42.0)
1168 (46.0)
1268 (49.9)
1368 (53.9)
1435 (56.5)
(4.1) 150 36
(5.9) (1.4)


Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
721
(28.4)
IP21, UL Type 1
676
(26.6)
Power Bay Power Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
1661 2132
(65.4) (83.9)
Adjacent enclosure
1400
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
735 (28.9)
800 (15.7)
1335 (52.6)
(55.1)
Adjacent enclosure and control bay

Mounting Holes 1700
(66.9)
535
(21.1)
105
0 (0)
68 (2.7)
168 (6.6)
268 (10.6)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
568 (22.4)
668 (26.3)
735 (28.9)
800 (15.7)
868 (34.2)
968 (38.1)
1068 (42.0)
1168 (46.0)
1268 (50.0)
1335 (52.6)
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
235 (9.3)
300 (11.8)
368 (14.5)
468 (18.4)
568 (22.4)
668 (26.3)
768 (30.2)
868 (34.2)
968 (38.1)
1168 (46.0)
1268 (49.9)
1368 (53.9)
1468 (57.8)
1568 (61.7)
1035 (40.7)
1100 (43.3)
1635 (64.4)
(4.1) 150 36
(5.9) (1.4)


Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
1442
(56.8)
183 IP21, UL Type 1
(7.2) 1352
(5)
305
(12.0) 310
(12.2)
Power Bay Exit Wire Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
1500
(59.0)
Adjacent cabinet and control bay
Mounting Holes
240
(9.4)
535
440 (21.1)
(17.3)
72 (2.8)
535
(21.1)

65 (2.6)
0 (0)
235 (9.3)
300 (11.8)
1035 (40.7)
1100 (43.3)
1148 (45.2)
1388 (54.6)
1436 (56.5)

Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
1442
(56.8)
183 IP21, UL Type 1
(7.2) 1352
(53.2)
305 305
(12.0) (12.0) 310
(12.2)
Power Bay Power Bay Exit Wire Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
2300
(90.5)
Adjacent cabinet and control bay Mounting Holes
440
(17.3) 535
640 (21.1)
(25.2)
72 (2.8)
535
(21.1)

65 (2.6)
0 (0)
235 (9.3)
300 (11.8)
835 (32.8)
900 (35.4)
1435 (56.4)
1500 (59.0)
1548 (60.9)
2188 (86.1)
2236 (88.0)

Chapter 3
IP54, UL Type 12
1442
(56.8)
183 IP21, UL Type 1
(7.2) 1352
(53.2)
305 305
(12.0) (12.0) 310
(12.2)
Power Bay Power Bay Exit Wire Bay
IP54, UL Type 12
2291
(90.2)
IP21, UL Type 1
2132
(83.9)
2500
(98.4)
Adjacent cabinet and control bay Mounting Holes
440
(17.3) 535
640 (21.1)
(25.2)
72 (2.8)
440
(17.3) 535
640 (21.1)
(25.2)

1035 (40.7)
65 (2.6)
0 (0)
300 (11.8)
1100 (43.3)
1435 (56.5)
1500 (59.0)
1548 (60.9)
2188 (86.1)
235 (9.3)
2235 (88.0)

Chapter 3
Common Bus Inverters Control Bay and Optional Exit Wire Bays Top, Front, and Bottom Views - Dimensions are mm (in.)
Motor Cables - 305 305 305

Top Exit (12.0) (12.0) (12.0)
183 183
(7.2) (7.2)
676
(26.6) 676
Motor Cables - 676
200 (26.6) Top Exit (26.6)
(7.9) 310 310
45 (12.2) (12.2)
(1.8)
Signal Cables -
Top Entry
Control Bay
Wire Bay Wire Bay
2132 2000 2000

(83.9) (78.7) (78.7)
1571
(61.9)
300 400 800

(11.8) (15.7) (31.5)
Mounting Holes 140 Mounting Holes 240 Mounting Holes 640
(5.5) (9.4) (25.2)
Motor Cables -
440 440 440
(17.3) (17.3) Bottom Exit (17.3)
Signal Cables - 535 535 535
Bottom Entry (21.1) (21.1) (21.1)
Motor Cables -
Bottom Exit
A B 36
A B 36
A B 36
(1.4) (1.4) (1.4)
Control Bay – 300 (11.8) Wide Exit Bay – 400 (15.7) Wide Exit Bay – 800 (31.5) Wide
Frame
A B A B A B
8 300 (11.8) 65 (2.6) 400 (15.7) 735 (28.9) — —
9 300 (11.8) 65 (2.6) 600 (23.6) 935 (36.8) — —
10 300 (11.8) 65 (2.6) 800 (31.5) 1135 (44.7) — —
11 300 (11.8) 65 (2.6) — — 1200 (47.2) 1935 (76.1)
12 300 (11.8) 65 (2.6) — — 1400 (55.1) 2135 (84.0)

Chapter 3
Notes:

Chapter 4
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
The PowerFlex® 755T installation process is divided into three principal tasks:
• Mechanically install the enclosures
• Make the electrical interconnections between enclosures if required
• Make power supply and motor connections (Chapter 5)
Installation of Products with PowerFlex products manufactured with XT use protective covers to help seal
connectors against environments with corrosive gases. To help provide
Corrosive Gas Protection (XT) improved performance in these environments, only remove protective covers to
make a required connection. Do not remove protective covers from unused
connectors.
Prepare Floor Mount Access to the enclosure interior is required during product installation to
complete the following tasks:
Enclosures
• Join enclosures with external hardware (applies to product that is
divided for shipment)
• Anchor the enclosure to the mounting surface
• Make electrical interconnections
If your installation involves multiple enclosure sections, you can refer to the
Approximate Dimensions section of Chapter 3 to help you understand how
the enclosures are arranged.
1. Use the double-bit key that is provided to open the power bay door.
2. To access interior components and to make mechanical and electrical

connections, remove the protective touch guards. See Remove
Protective Touch Guards on page 120 for instructions for removing the
guards that are found in each enclosure type.
3. To determine which power and LCL filter modules you must remove to
facilitate installation, review Component Removal Requirements on
page 100.

Chapter 4
4. Remove the required power modules and LCL filter modules for the
product you are installing.
Each module is marked with a unique position number that corresponds
with a module location inside the cabinet. See Figure 23 on page 102.
The PowerFlex 750-Series module service cart, catalog number 20-750-
MCART1 is recommended to move power modules and is required for
LCL filter modules.
Component Removal This section outlines which components must be removed to install each
PowerFlex 755T floor mount product. Each figure illustrates the minimum
Requirements requirement to allow adequate access to join and anchor the enclosures, and to
interconnect bus bars. All modules can be removed however to facilitate
installation further. With all modules removed, it is easier to place, align, join,
anchor, and interconnect the enclosures.
During installation, it is recommended that you designate a secure temporary

storage area for the components that you remove from the enclosure. LCL
filter modules and power modules present a tip-over hazard when removed
from the enclosure. Measures must be taken to be sure that modules are stored
in such a way that they do not pose a hazard.
IMPORTANT LCL filter modules and power modules are labeled to indicate their
designated position in the product enclosure. Always reinstall modules in
their corresponding factory-designated position. Make note of these labels
during component removal. See Figure 23 on page 102 for label locations.
Temporary Component Storage
Do not store components in active isles or work areas. A dedicated area that is
designated for the temporary storage of the components that are removed
during the installation process is recommended. Loose components can be
hazardous and easily damaged.
Recommended Equipment and Accessories

Equipment is available that is designed to help you safely handle major
components. The following equipment is recommended:
• PowerFlex 750-Series module service cart, catalog number 20-750-
MCART1, publication 750-IN105
• PowerFlex 755T DC precharge module lift, catalog number 20-750-
MCART2, publication 750-IN105
• PowerFlex 750TM power and LCL filter module storage hardware,
catalog number 20-750-MINV-ATIP, publication 750-IN106

Chapter 4
• PowerFlex 755T power module service ramp, catalog number 20-750-

MRAMP1, publication 750-IN108
IMPORTANT The service ramp is used only with power modules when the
cabinet is mounted directly to the floor. Do not use the ramp to
remove LCL filter modules from the cabinet. Review service ramp
instructions before using.
For a list of Commonly Used Tools see page 22.
PowerFlex 755TL Drives, 755TR Drives, and 755TM Bus Supplies

This section lists the LCL filter modules, line side converters, and motor side
inverters that you must remove to install the product. Removal of these
components provides access to join and anchor the cabinets, and for making
the electrical interconnections between the cabinets.
For instructions on how to remove these components from the enclosure, see
the following sections.
• Remove Frame 7 Power Module on page 123
• Remove Frame 8…15 Power Module on page 129
• Remove Frame 7 LCL Filter Module on page 135
• Remove Frame 8…15 LCL Filter Module on page 139
IMPORTANT Each module is marked with a unique position number that corresponds
with a module location inside the cabinet. Always return a module to the
position specified.
The fiber-optic cables are also marked to identify the module that they
correspond with.

Chapter 4
Figure 23 - LCL Filter Module and Power Module Position Labels

Frame 8 Drive - LCL Filter and Power Modules Shown
F0 Label on Control Bus Assembly
F0 Label on LCL Filter Module

L0 Label on Control Bus Assembly
L0 Label on Line Side Power Module
Control Bus Assembly
M0 Label on Control Bus Assembly
M0 Label on Motor Side Power Module

LCL Filter Module
Line Side Converter Motor Side Inverter

Power Module Power Module
LCL Filter Module Position Designation Labels
This table provides the possible position designation labels for LCL filter
module.
Table 17 - LCL Filter Module Labels for Frame Size
Frame Size
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0 F0
— — — F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2
— — — — — F4 F3 F4 F4
— — — — — — F5 F6 F5
— — — — — — — — F7
— — — — — — — — F9
Table 18 - Early Production LCL Filter Module Labels for Frame Size
Frame Size
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LCL0 LCL0 LCL0 LCL0 LCL0 LCL0 LCL0 LCL0 LCL0
— — — LCL1 LCL1 LCL1 LCL1 LCL1 LCL1
— — — — — LCL2 LCL2 LCL2 LCL2
— — — — — — LCL3 LCL3 LCL3
— — — — — — — — LCL4
— — — — — — — — LCL5

Chapter 4
Figure 24 - Frame 7 Drives
F0
L0 M0
Module Type Remove Position No. Shipping Split Section

LCL filter F0 Section 1 of 1
Line side converter L0
Motor side inverter M0
F0
L0 M0

Motor side inverter M0

Chapter 4
F0
L0 L1 M0 M1

Line side converter L0, L1
Motor side inverter M0, M1

Shipping Split
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2 M0 M1 M2

LCL filter F0 Section 1 of 2 (left section)
L2 Section 2 of 2 (right section)
LCL filter F2
Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2

Chapter 4

Shipping Split
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2 L3 M0 M1 M2 M3

L2, L3 Section 2 of 2 (right section)
LCL filter F2
Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3

Chapter 4

Shipping Splits
F0 F2 F4
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4

L2, L3, L4 Section 2 of 3 (center section)
LCL filter F2, F4
Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3, M4 Section 3 of 3 (right section)

Chapter 4

Shipping Split
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2 M0 M1 M2
Shipping Split
F5 F3
M5 M4 M3 L5 L4 L3

LCL filter F0 Section 2 of 6 (back-to-back left section)
Line side converter L0, L1 Section 5 of 7 (in-line left section)
L2 Section 3 of 6 (back-to-back right section)
LCL filter F2 Section 6 of 7 (in-line right section)
Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2
M5, M4, M3 Section 4 of 6 (back-to-back left section)
LCL filter F3 Section 2 of 7 (in-line left section)
L4, L3 Section 5 of 6 (back-to-back right section)

Chapter 4

Shipping Split
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2 L3 M0 M1 M2 M3
Shipping Split
F6 F4
M7 M6 M5 M4 L7 L6 L5 L4

LCL Filter F2 Section 6 of 7 (in-line right section)
Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3
M7, M6, M5, M4 Section 4 of 6 (back-to-back left section)

Chapter 4

Shipping Splits
F0 F2 F4
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4
Shipping Splits
F9 F7 F5
M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5

L2, L3, L4 Section 3 of 8 (back-to-back center section)
LCL filter F2, F4 Section 7 of 9 (in-line center section)
Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3, M4 Section 4 of 8 (back-to-back right section)
Section 8 of 9 (in-line right section
M9, M8, M7, M6, M5 Section 5 of 8 (back-to-back left section)
Section 2 of 9 (in-line left section)
LCL filter F5, F7 Section 6 of 8 (back-to-back center section)
Line side converter L9, L8, L7 Section 3 of 9 (in-line center section)

Chapter 4
PowerFlex 755TM Bus Supplies

This section lists the LCL filter modules and line side converters that you must
remove to install the product. For instructions on how to remove these
components from the enclosure, see Remove Frame 7 Power Module on page
123 and Remove Frame 7 LCL Filter Module on page 135.
Figure 33 - Frame 7 Bus Supply
F0
L0

F0
L0


Chapter 4
F0
L0 L1

Line side converter L0, L1 Section 1 of 1
LCL filter F0
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2

Line side converter L0, L1, L2 Section 1 of 1
LCL filter F0, F2

Chapter 4

Shipping Split
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2 L3

Line side converter L0, L1 Section 1 of 2 (left section)
LCL filter F0
F2 Section 2 of 2 (right section)

Shipping Split
F0 F2 F4
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4

Line side converter L0, L1 Section 1 of 2 (left section)
LCL filter F0
F2, F4 Section 2 of 2 (right section)
Line side converter L2, L3, L4

Chapter 4
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2
F5 F3
L5 L4 L3

Line side converter L0, L1, L2 Section 2 of 4 (back-to-back center section)
LCL filter F0, F2 Section 1 of 3 (in-line center section)
F3, F5 Section 3 of 4 (back-to-back center section)
Line side converter L5, L4, L3 Section 3 of 3 (in-line center section)

Chapter 4

Shipping Split
F0 F2
L0 L1 L2 L3
Shipping Split
F6 F4
L7 L6 L5 L4

Line side converter L0, L1 Section 2 of 6 (back-to-back left section)
F2 Section 3 of 6 (back-to-back right section)
Line side converter L2, L3 Section 5 of 5 (in-line right section)
L7, L6 Section 4 of 6 (back-to-back left section)

Chapter 4

Shipping Split
F0 F2 F4
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4
Shipping Split
F9 F7 F5
L9 L8 L7 L6 L5

Line side converter L0, L1 Section 2 of 6 (back-to-back left section)
F2, F4 Section 3 of 6 (back-to-back right section)
Line side converter L2, L3, L4 Section 5 of 5 (in-line right section)
L9, L8, L7 Section 4 of 6 (back-to-back left section)
LCL filter F5, F7 Section 1 of 5 (in-line left section)

Chapter 4
PowerFlex 755TM Common Bus Inverters
This section lists the motor side inverters that you must remove to install the
product. For instructions on how to remove this component from the
enclosure, see Remove Frame 7 Power Module on page 123.
Figure 42 - Frame 8 Common Bus Inverter
M0

Motor side inverter M0 Section 1 of 1 (in-line)
M0 M1

Motor side inverter M0, M1 Section 1 of 1 (in-line)

Chapter 4
M0 M1 M2

Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2 Section 1 of 1 (in-line)
M0 M1 M2 M3

Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3 Section 1 of 1 (in-line)

Chapter 4
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4

Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3, M4 Section 1 of 1 (in-line)
M0 M1 M2 M5 M4 M3
Module Type Remove Position No. Shipping Split Section (1)

Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2 Section 1 of 3 (back-to-back)
Motor side inverter M5, M4, M3 Section 2 of 3 (back-to-back)
(1) Section 3 of 3 is the exit wire bay.

Chapter 4
M0 M1 M2 M3 M7 M6 M5 M4

Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3 Section 1 of 3 (back-to-back)
Motor side inverter M7, M6, M5, M4 Section 2 of 3 (back-to-back)
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5

Motor side inverter M0, M1, M2, M3, M4 Section 1 of 3 (back-to-back)
Motor side inverter M9, M8, M7, M6, M5 Section 2 of 3 (back-to-back)

Chapter 4
Remove Protective Touch You must remove the protective touch guards to access other components
inside a product enclosure. This section covers the removal procedure for each
Guards of the enclosure types and enclosure widths. Follow the procedures to remove
and replace the protective guards.
ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when

protective touch guards are removed. Guards help to protect against
accidental contact with exposed electrical connections and components.
Guards can also provide electrical insulation between components. Remove
guards only when access is required. Replace guards promptly. Never operate
PowerFlex 755T products without all guards in place.
Follow these steps to remove and replace the protective touch guards in an
input bay.
1. Review the Product Advisories on page 7.

2. Open the enclosure door.
3. Loosen the M5.5 screws that secure the protective touch guards.
It is not necessary to remove these screws.
When you reinstall the guards, tighten the screws to the torque listed.
Figure 50 - Wire Bay Touch Guards

M5.5
T25
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in)
400 mm (15.7 in.) 800 mm (31.5 in.)

Chapter 4
Figure 51 - Control and Input Bay Touch Guards
M5.5
T25
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in)
400 mm (15.7 in.) Input Bay 600 mm (23.6 in.) Input Bay
Used with frame 8 drives and bus supplies. Used with frame 9 drives and bus supplies.
300 mm (11.8 in.) Control Bay

Used with Common Bus Inverters
1000 mm (39.4 in.) Input Bay

Used with frame 10…15 drives and bus supplies.

Chapter 4
Figure 52 - Power Bay Touch Guards
A cable tie secures the HIM

communication cable to the guard.
Cut the cable tie to remove the guard.
Replace the cable tie when you install
the guard.
M5.5
T25
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in) Frame 7 Drives and Bus Supplies Frame 8 Drives and Bus Supplies
Line Side Converter Power Bay Motor Side Inverter Power Bay Motor Side Inverter Power Bay
600 mm (23.6 in.) and 800 mm (31.5 in.) 400 mm (15.7 in.), 600 mm (23.6 in.), and 800 mm (31.5 in.) With DC Precharge
Used with fame 9…15 drives and bus supplies. Used with fame 8…15 common bus inverters.

Chapter 4
Remove Frame 7 Power Follow these steps to remove the power module from the frame 7 enclosure.
Module
ATTENTION: IGBT power and LCL filter modules have a high center of gravity
and a tip-over hazard exists. To guard against death, serious personal injury,
or equipment damage, do not subject the module to high rates of
acceleration or deceleration while transporting. Do not push or pull above
the points that are indicated on the module.

3. Remove the protective guard. See Remove Protective Touch Guards on
page 120.
4. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the connection cover to the front
of the power module.
5. Use the screw to lift the connections cover up and off the power module
chassis.
– =
4 P2 or F - 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)
1.8 N•m (16 lb•in)
IMPORTANT Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is

50 mm (2 in.). Any bends with a shorter inside radius
can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable. Signal 50 mm
attenuation increases as inside bend radius is (2 in.)
decreased.

Chapter 4
6. Without bending the cable to a radius less than 50 mm (2 in.), remove

the fiber-optic cables from the transceiver in the CTL and PDI (if
present) ports on the power interface circuit board and remove the fiber-
optic cables from the power module chassis.
7. For line side converter power modules, disconnect the DC fuse wire
harness connector P1 from connector J1 on the I/O panel on the power
module.
8. For line side converter power modules, disconnect the 24V DC signal
wire harness connector P3 from J3 on the I/O panel on the power
module.
9. Disconnect the 240V AC and optional 24V DC power supply wire
harness connector P4 from J4 on the I/O panel on the power module.
J4 J3
J1
Fiber-optic Ports

Chapter 4
10. Remove the two M12 nuts that secure the top of the DC fuses to the
DC bus terminals on the line side converter power module. For bus
supplies, remove the DC link/fuses.
11. For drives only, remove the two M10 nuts that secure the DC link bus
bars to the DC terminals on the motor side converter power module and
remove the DC link/fuse assembly.
Regenerative Drive Configuration Shown.

M12
10 19 mm
45 N•m (398 lb•in)
10
LCL Filter Module Not Shown

for Clarity Only
11
M10
11 17 mm
37.9 N•m (336 lb•in)

Chapter 4
12. For the line side converter power module, remove the six M8 x 30 mm
torx screws that secure the AC input flexible bus bars to the AC input
terminals on the power module, and remove the flexible bus bars.
M8 x 30 mm
12 T40
19.8 N•m (175 lb•in)
3x

Chapter 4
13. For the motor side inverter module, remove the six M8 x 30 mm torx
screws that secure the AC output flexible bus bars to the AC output
terminals on the power module, and remove the flexible bus bars.
M8 x 30 mm
13 T40
19.8 N•m (175 lb•in)
3x

Chapter 4
14. Remove the two M10 x 20 mm torx screws that secure the upper power
module chassis to the module support bracket.
15. Leave the two M10 x 20 mm screws that secure the power module
chassis to the floor mounting bracket while preparing the PowerFlex
750-Series service cart or service ramp.
16. To remove the module by using the service cart, follow the detailed
instructions in the PowerFlex 750-Series Service Cart and DCPC
Module Lift Installation Instructions, publication 750-IN105.
To remove the module using PowerFlex 755TM service ramp, follow the
procedures that are detailed in the PowerFlex 755T Module Service
Ramp Instructions, publication 750-IN108.
17. To release the power module, remove the two remaining M10 screws.
18. Remove the power module from the enclosure.
M10 x 20 mm
14, T45
17 19.8 N•m (175 lb•in)
14
17

Chapter 4
Remove Frame 8…15 Power Follow these steps to remove a power module from a frame 8…15 enclosure.
Module 1. Review the Product Advisories on page 7.
3. Remove the protective touch guards from the enclosure. See Remove
Protective Touch Guards on page 120.
4. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the connections cover to the front
of the power module.
chassis.
Figure 53 - Power Module Connections Cover
–
P2 or F - 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)
1.8 N•m (16 lb•in)
4
5

Chapter 4
6. Disconnect the PDI and CTL fiber-optic cables, if present, from the
power layer interface circuit board. See Figure 54.
7. Without bending the cables to a radius less than 50 mm (2 in.), carefully
remove the cables from the power module chassis.
Figure 54 - PDI and CTL Fiber-optic Cable Connections
One line side converter with LCL filter. Two line side converters LCL filter.
IMPORTANT Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 50

mm (2 in.). Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable. Signal 50 mm
decreased.
For the following steps, refer to Figure 55.

8. If present, disconnect the cable connector P1 from connector J1 on the
I/O panel in the power module and remove the cable from the power
module chassis.
9. If present, disconnect the cable connector P2 from connector J2 on the
I/O panel in the power module remove the cable from the power
module chassis.
10. Disconnect the cable connector P3 from connector J3 on the I/O panel
in the power module and remove the cable from the power module
chassis.
11. Disconnect the cable connector P4 from connector J4 on the I/O panel
in the power module and remove the cable from the power module
chassis.

Chapter 4
Figure 55 - Power Module I/O Panel Connections
P1
P3 P4
12. Loosen the two M10 x 10 mm hex nuts (See 1 in Figure 56) that secure
the power input/output terminals to the DC precharge module or DC
link fuse terminals. It is not necessary to remove these hex nuts.
A ratcheting wrench is recommended to help access these hex nuts.

Chapter 4
13. Remove the two M10 x 20 mm screws (see 2 in Figure 56) that secure
the power module chassis to the control bus frame.
Figure 56 - Chassis and DC Bus Connections - Frame 8…15 Power Modules
Control bus frame.

2
1 M10 x 10 mm
17 mm Ratcheting Wrench
38 N•m (336 lb•in)
2 M10 x 20mm
T45
42.4 N•m (375 lb•in)
Leave these M10 screws in place while

preparing the service cart or ramp.
Remove in Step 15.
15 M10 x 20mm
T45 15
42.4 N•m (375 lb•in)
14. Leave the two M10 x 20 mm screws that secure the power module
750-Series service cart or service ramp.
To remove the module using the PowerFlex 750-Series service cart,

follow the procedures that are detailed in the PowerFlex 750-Series
Service Cart and DCPC Module Lift Instructions, publication 750-
IN105.
To remove the module using PowerFlex 755TM service ramp, follow the
procedures that are detailed in the PowerFlex 755T Module Service
Ramp Instructions, publication 750-IN108.

Chapter 4
15. To release the power module, remove the two remaining M10 screws
(see Figure 56).
16. Remove the power module from the enclosure.
Center of gravity label.
ATTENTION: LCL filter modules and power modules have a high center of
gravity and a tip-over hazard exists. To guard against death, serious personal
injury, or equipment damage, do not subject the module to high rates of

Chapter 4
Install Power Modules in the Enclosure
Install the power modules into the enclosure in the reverse order of removal.
When you install the fiber-optic cables:
1. Remove the transceiver from the fiber-optic connector port on the

power layer interface circuit board.

can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable. Signal
50 mm
decreased.
2. Without bending the cable to a radius less than 50 mm (2 in.), fully

insert the fiber-optic cable into the transceiver.
3. Insert the transceiver and fiber-optic cable into the connector on the
board, until you hear an audible ‘click.’
Do Not Touch
Greased Connector
Remove protective
covers only as needed.
Be sure that both plugs are fully engaged and seated and that the swing
arm is down.

Chapter 4
Remove Frame 7 LCL Filter Follow these steps to remove the LCL filter module from a frame 7 enclosure.
Module
ATTENTION: IGBT power and LCL filter modules have a high center of gravity
and a tip-over hazard exists. To guard against death, serious personal injury,
or equipment damage, do not subject the module to high rates of

3. Remove the protective guard. See Remove Protective Touch Guards on
page 120.
4. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the connection cover to the front
of the line side converter power module.
chassis.

decreased.
6. Without bending the cable to a radius less than 50 mm (2 in.), remove

the fiber-optic cable from the transceiver in the PDI port of the power
interface circuit board in the power module and remove the fiber-optic
cable from the power module chassis.
IMPORTANT Observing the minimum bend radius, carefully coil the fiber optic
cable and secure it to the LCL filter module where it cannot be
damaged.

Chapter 4
7. Disconnect the 24V DC signal wire harness connector P3 from J3 on

the I/O panel in the line side converter power module.
–
= 7 (J3)
4 P2 or F - 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)
1.8 N•m (16 lb•in)
6 (PDI Fiber-optic Port)

Chapter 4
8. Remove the two M8 x 30 mm torx screws that secure the circuit breaker
AC output flexible bus bars to the AC input terminals on the LCL filter
and remove the bus bars.
9. Remove the two M8 x 30 mm torx screws that secure each of the LCL
filter AC output flexible bus bars to the AC input terminals on the line
side converter power module and remove the bus bars.
M8 x 30 mm
8, 9 T40
19.8 N•m (175 lb•in)
3x
3x
10. Remove the two M10 x 20 mm torx screws that secure the upper LCL
filter module chassis to the module support bracket.
11. Leave the two M10 x 20 mm screws that secure the LCL filter chassis to
the floor mounting bracket while preparing the PowerFlex 750-Series
service cart.

Chapter 4
12. To remove the module by using the service cart, follow the detailed
instructions in the PowerFlex 750-Series Service Cart and DCPC
Module Lift Installation Instructions, publication 750-IN105.
IMPORTANT The AC fuse wire harness and 240V AC power wire harness
connections are on the back of the LCL filter module. These
connectors must be removed before you can release the module
fully from the enclosure.
13. Remove the two remaining M10 screws at the bottom of the module,
and pull the module out only as far as necessary to expose the
connections at the back of the module.
M10 x 20 mm
10, T45
13 19.8 N•m (175 lb•in)
10
Circuit Breaker AC Output Flexible Bus Bars

and Fuses Not Shown for Clarity Only.
Fuse and 240V AC Power Harness

Connections at Back of Module.
13

Chapter 4
14. Disconnect the AC fuse wire harness connector P1 from connector J1

on the LCL filter I/O panel.
15. Disconnect the 240V AC power wire harness connector P2 from J2 on
the LCL filter module I/O panel.
J1 J2
P3
16. Remove the LCL filter module from the enclosure.
Remove Frame 8…15 LCL Follow these steps to remove the LCL filter module from a frame 8…15
enclosure.
Filter Module
Power Module Connections
If power modules have already been removed, skip this section and go to LCL
Module Connections on page 142.

3. If present, remove the protective guards from the enclosure. See Remove
Protective Touch Guards on page 120.

Chapter 4
4. Loosen the screw that secures the connections cover to the front of any
adjoining power module.
chassis.
Figure 57 - Power Module Connections Covers
4
5

can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable. Signal 50 mm
decreased.

Chapter 4
6. Disconnect the PDI and CTL fiber-optic cables, if present, from the
power layer interface circuit board.
Figure 58 - Power Module PDI and CTL Fiber-optic Cable Connections
LCL filter with one line side converter. LCL filter with two line side converters.
7. Without bending the cable to a radius less than 50 mm (2 in.), carefully

remove the disconnected fiber-optic cables from the power module
chassis. See Figure 58.
8. Disconnect any P1 through P4 cables that are plugged into the I/O
panel in the power modules. See Figure 59.
Figure 59 - Power Module I/O Panel Connections
P1
P3 P4
9. Carefully remove the disconnected cables from the power module

chassis.

Chapter 4
LCL Module Connections
1. Disconnect the AC input fuse wire harness connector P5 and the

240 volt connector P4 on the LCL filter module. See Figure 60.
Figure 60 - LCL Filter Wiring Harnesses
P5
P4
P2 P1
Power Control Bus AC Fuse

Chapter 4
2. Remove the three M12 x 13 mm hex nuts that secure the Flexbus cables
to the AC input fuse terminals and remove the Flexbus cables. See
Figure 61.
Figure 61 - Chassis and AC Bus Connections
2 3
3x
2 M12 x 13 mm
19 mm
45 N•m (398 lb•in)
3 M10 x 20mm
T45
42.4 N•m (375 lb•in)
Leave these M10 screws in place while

preparing the service cart or ramp.
Remove in Step 5.
3. Remove the two M10 x 20 mm screws that secure the LCL filter module
chassis to the control bus frame.
Leave the two M10 x 20 mm screws that secure the LCL filter module
750-Series service cart.
4. Secure the service cart to the floor mounting bracket in the enclosure.
See PowerFlex 750-Series Service Cart Instructions, publication 750-
IN105, for information on using the service cart.
5. To release the LCL filter module, remove the two remaining M10 screws
that secure the module to the cabinet floor.

Chapter 4
6. To remove the LCL filter module from the enclosure, use the service
cart, 20-750-MCART1.
Center of gravity label.
ATTENTION: LCL filter modules and power modules have a high center of
gravity and a tip-over hazard exists. To guard against death, serious personal
injury, or equipment damage, do not subject the module to high rates of
the points indicated on the module.

Chapter 4
Install the LCL Filter Module in the Enclosure
Install the LCL filter module into the enclosure in the reverse order of removal.
When installing the fiber-optic cables:
1. Remove the transceiver from the fiber-optic connector port on the

power layer interface circuit board on the adjoining power module.

can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable. Signal
50 mm
decreased.
2. Without bending the cable to a radius less than 50 mm (2 in.), fully

insert the fiber-optic cable into the transceiver.
3. Insert the transceiver and fiber-optic cable into the connector on the
board, until you hear an audible ‘click.’
Do Not Touch
Greased Connector
Remove protective
Be sure that both plugs are fully engaged and seated and that the swing
arm is down.
Place Enclosures If your PowerFlex 755T product consists of multiple enclosures, the enclosures
must be arranged as shown in the dimensional drawings that start on page 66.
ATTENTION: Install the drive on a level surface (± 1 mm per meter
[± 0.036 in. per 36 in.] of drive length in all directions). If necessary, use
metal shims to level the enclosures before joining them; any attempt to level
after joining can twist or misalign the enclosures.

Chapter 4
Position the Enclosure
1. Release the enclosure from the shipping skid. For multiple enclosures,
start with input bay.
M12
19 mm
-
2. Place the enclosure on supports, such as wooden beams, to provide

enough space to remove the bolts that secure the cleats to the enclosure.
M12
19 mm
-
3. Position and place the enclosure.

Chapter 4
Join Enclosures PowerFlex 755T products that ship in multiple sections must be connected
after the sections are in their final positions. The enclosures are connected
together using the joining hardware that is provided.
Each of the three types of enclosure connections is made in the same way.
• Entry wire bay to input bay
• Power bay to power bay
• Power bay to exit wire bay
Prepare Input/Power Bay
Follow these steps Frame 13…15 Drives and Bus Supplies
1. Locate the box or boxes that hold coils of fiber-optic cables.
2. Remove and discard packaging.

3. Carefully uncoil the fiber-optic cables.
4. Compare the cable labels with the corresponding figure in the Fiber-
optic Cable Routing by Product and Frame Size on page 176.

Chapter 4
Follow the next sequence of steps for all frame sizes and products
1. Apply the gasket in one continuous strip around the mating surface of
the enclosure. Seam the gasket at the approximate middle of the bottom
of the enclosure.
Seam Location
2. Align the enclosures that are to be joined.

3. Bring loose cabinet to the placed cabinet.
Feed any fiber-optic cables into the loose cabinet during this step.
Uncoiled
Fiber-optic
cables
4. Bring the aligned enclosures tight together.

Chapter 4
5. Remove the structural angles.
IMPORTANT Make any final position and leveling adjustments before this step.
M12
19 mm
38 N•m (336 lb•in)
Install IP54, UL Type 12 Roof Assemblies
1. Remove the shipping roof panels.

Chapter 4
2. Lower the IP54, UL Type 12 roof assemblies on to the enclosures.
IMPORTANT Use care not to damage the roof assembly gasket material.
When lifting and handling these components, follow all applicable
local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations or
industry guidelines for safe practices.
3. Connect the fan wiring harnesses.
M8
13 mm
4.8 N•m (42 lb•in)
PE P2
P14
4. To make the PE ground connection, use the M8 nut provided.

Chapter 4
Install Joining Hardware – Standard Installation

Use the joining hardware that is provided to connect the enclosures together
mechanically. Nine frame clamps and two top bracket sets are provided for
each split.
1. Install the top bracket sets to the cabinets.

Verify that the cabinets are aligned, level, and pushed together tightly.
IMPORTANT The paint-piercing rubber washers are required for both grounding
purposes and to meet the enclosure rating.
2. Install the bolts that join the two angle brackets and tighten.
3. Install the interior frame clamps.
4. Tighten the interior frame clamps.
IMPORTANT Do not attempt to lift enclosures that are joined with this hardware.
1 M12 2 M12
19 mm 19 mm
20.0 N•m (177 lb•in) 42.4 N•m (375 lb•in)
Top Bracket Sets
1
Paint-piercing rubber washer.
Frame Clamps
A total of nine interior
frame clamps are used to
join two cabinets. See
Figure 62 for clamp
positions.
4
Cabinet Back
Enclosure door omitted for clarity.
4 –
– Cabinet Front
9.0 N•m (79 lb•in)

Chapter 4
Figure 62 - Internal Frame Clamp Spacing – Standard Installation

Top Bracket Sets
Install top clamp on door

side of the enclosure only.
Frame Clamps Enclosure Back Side
1869 mm
(73.6 in.)
1368 mm
(53.9 in.)
918 mm
(36.1 in.)
243 mm
(9.6 in.)
43 mm
(1.7 in.)

Chapter 4
Secure and Seal Roof Panels – Standard Installation
To secure and seal the roof panels, use the M12 screws with integral paint-
piercing rubber washers.
IMPORTANT The paint-piercing rubber washers are required for both grounding purposes
and to meet the enclosure rating.
M12
19 mm
M12 Screw 20 N•m (177 lb•in)
Paint-piercing Washer

Chapter 4
Install Joining Hardware – Seismic Installation

Optional top bracket sets are available for installations that are at risk of a
seismic event. See page 53 for information about seismic qualified installations.
If equipment is delivered in sections, use the standard frame clamps to connect

the enclosures together. Discard the standard top bracket sets and install the
clamps from the seismic kit. Each kit includes parts for the largest possible
enclosure lineup for frame size. Therefore, in some cases, not all parts in the kit
are installed.
1. Install the top bracket sets to each of the cabinet seams.

Verify that the cabinets are aligned, level, and pushed together tightly at
the shipping splits.
IMPORTANT Install top bracket sets at all cabinet seams front and back.
2. Install the bolts that join the two angle brackets and tighten.
3. Install the interior frame clamps.
4. Tighten the interior frame clamps.
IMPORTANT Do not attempt to lift enclosures that are joined with this hardware.
1 M12 2 M12
19 mm 19 mm
20.0 N•m (177 lb•in) 42.4 N•m (375 lb•in)
Seismic Top Bracket Sets
1
Paint-piercing rubber washer 2
Frame Clamps
A total of nine interior
frame clamps are used to
join two cabinets. See
Figure 63 for clamp
positions.
4
4
–
–
9.0 N•m
(79 lb•in)
Cabinet Back
Enclosure door omitted for clarity.
Cabinet Front

Chapter 4
Figure 63 - Internal Frame Clamp Spacing – Seismic Installation

Seismic Top Bracket Sets
Install top clamp on door

side of the enclosure only.
Frame Clamps Enclosure Back Side
1869 mm
(73.6 in.)
1368 mm
(53.9 in.)
918 mm
(36.1 in.)
243 mm
(9.6 in.)
43 mm
(1.7 in.)

Chapter 4
Secure and Seal Roof Panels and Side Sheet – Seismic Installation
1. Use the M12 bolts, washers, and seismic brackets to secure and seal the
roof panels.
2. Use the M12 bolts and nuts to join the seismic brackets
M12
1 19 mm
M12 Bolt 20 N•m (177 lb•in)
Flat Washer /tN
MCtJO
Seismic Bracket
Paint-piercing Washer
2
/tN
M12 Bolt MCtJO
M12 Nut with

Spring Washer

Chapter 4
3. Use the M8 and M6 screws to fasten the span bar between the seismic
brackets on the input bay.
4. To secure the door stops, insert the M8 self-locking pins and wing
screws.
M8 Self Locking Pin

M6 Wing Screw
M8 Screw
M6 Screw
Seismic bracket set used with the 1000 mm

(39.4 in.) wide Input Bay found on frame 10
and larger drives and bus supplies. Bracket sets with door latches are used on frame 9 and
larger drives.

Chapter 4
Affix the Enclosures to the Use one of the mounting methods that are described in Floor Mounting
Options on page 60 to secure the enclosures to the mounting surface.
Floor
The approximate dimension drawings on pages 66…97 show conduit openings
and mounting holes.
Electrical Interconnections After the product enclosures are mechanically joined and properly anchored to
the mounting surface, electrically connect the enclosures together. There are
five electrical interconnections that are required:
• AC bus
• DC bus
• Control bus
• PE ground
• Fiber-optic connections
Figure 64 - Bus Bar Locations

AC Power Supply Bus Bars
DC Bus Bars
Control Bus Bars and

Fiber-optic Guide
PE Ground Bus Bar

Chapter 4
Figure 65 - Splicing Hardware
M10
85 mm 15 mm
(3.3 in.) 38 N•m (336 lb•in)
268.5 mm
(10.6 in.)
AC Bus Bar Splicing Hardware
M10
15 mm
85 mm 38 N•m (336 lb•in)
(3.3 in.)
186 mm
(7.3 in.)
DC Bus Bar Splicing Hardware
Control Bus Bar Splicing Hardware
M6
T20
10.2 N•m (90 lb•in)
PE Ground Bar Splicing Hardware

Chapter 4
Special Instructions—Right-to-Left Configurations
To install a common bus inverter on the left side of a frame 10 or larger bus
supply, additional steps are required. Remove the left AC precharge resistor
bank to access the DC bus bar and install the DC bus bar splice hardware.
Follow these steps to remove the left AC precharge resistor bank.
1. Disconnect the wires from the AC precharge resistor bank assembly.

2. Remove the anchor screws that secure the assembly to the mounting
bracket.
3. Slide the assembly out of the cabinet.
The DC bus bars are now accessible for installation of the splice
hardware.
M8 x 1.25 x 20 mm
1 T40
19.8 N•m (175 lb•in)
M5 x 12 mm 2
2 T25
7.9 N•m (70 lb•in)
2
To reinstall the AC precharge resistor bank, perform steps 1...3 in reverse order.

Chapter 4
Access the Control Pod The control pod is mounted to the chassis on frame 5 drives and frame 6 drives
and bus supplies. A removable panel is provided for access to the control pod
without cover removal.
Figure 66 - Frame 5 and 6 Control Pod Locations
T15 or F - 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)

0.45 N•m (4 lb•in)
Frame 5 Frame 6 Typical Control Pod Access

755TL and 755TR Drives 755TL and 755TR Drives and 755TM Bus Supplies Frame 5 and 6 Products (Frame 5 Shown)
The control pod is located top right front in a frame 7 cabinet.
Figure 67 - Frame 7 Control Pod Location
0.45 N•m (4 lb•in)

1
Frame 7 Frame 7 Control Pod Cover Removal

755TL and 755TR Drives and 755TM Bus Supplies

Chapter 4
The control pod is located in the input bay of 755T drives and bus supplies and
the control bay of a common bus inverter, if equipped.
Figure 68 - Frame 8…15 Control Pod Locations
Input Bay Control Bay

755TL and 755TR Drives and 755TM Bus Supplies 755TM Common Bus Inverters
M4 x 8 mm
T25
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in)

Chapter 4
Control Pod HIM Cradle without DPI Connector (Standard)
1. Loosen the retention screw.

2. Lift the cradle until the latch engages.
M3 x 6.4 mm
T15 of F - 5 mm (0.19 in.)
0.45 N•m (4 lb•in)
Control Pod HIM Cradle with DPI Connector (XT)
1. Loosen the retention screw.

2. If used, disconnect the DPI cable from the connector on the bottom of
the HIM cradle.
3. Lift the cradle until the latch engages.
1
3
M3 x 6.4 mm
2 T15 of F - 5 mm (0.19 in.) Do not remove the protective cover
0.45 N•m (4 lb•in)
from these connectors on the HIM
cradle unless a connection is made
during installation.

Chapter 4
Hardware Connections The human interface module, internal power devices, and option module
hardware connections are made in the control pod. The host drive and
embedded functions are assigned fixed port numbers that cannot be changed.
Each option module is assigned a port number that is based on where it is
installed.
Figure 69 - Control Pod with Fiber Interface Board
6 5
1
3
Item Description
1 Frames 7…15 transceiver board fiber-optic cable connectors. Transceiver boards are installed on the
fiber interface board.
2 Frames 7…15 transceiver board connectors for TAM/AC prechage, L0 and L1 converters, M0 and M1
inverters.
3 Frames 10…15 transceiver board connectors for L2…L9 converters and M2…M9 inverters.
4 Splitter cable.
5 DPI connector for handheld HIM, remote HIM, and splitter cable connection.
6 Embedded EtherNet/IP™ connectors.
7 HIM cradle connector.
8 Option module connectors.
See the PowerFlex 750-Series I/O, Feedback, and Power Option Modules Installation Instructions,
publication 750-IN111 for option module installation recommendations and requirements.

Chapter 4
Main Control Circuit Board

2
2 1
1
3
3
11
4 4
5 5
6
6
11
SK-RM-MCB1-PF755 (Standard) SK-RM-MCB2-PF755 (XT)
7 7
10
8
8
Table 19 - Main Control Circuit Board Details

Item Name Description
1 HIM Connector Terminal block connector for the DPI Port 1 (HIM Cradle) cable
connection.
2 Fan Connector Power supply for internal cooling fan.
3 Control Selector Rotary switch for setting the programming mode.
4 Embedded EtherNet/IP(1) Address Rotary switches for setting lowest octet of EtherNet address (forces
Selectors address to 192.168.1.xxx). See the PowerFlex Drives with
TotalFORCE Control Programming Manual for instructions on
setting the IP address.
• Firmware revision 6.xxx and earlier, publication 750-PM100
• Firmware Revision 10.xxx and later, publication 750-PM101
5 SAFETY Jumper Safety enable jumper. Removed when safety option is installed.
6 ENABLE Jumper Hardware enable jumper. TB1 becomes an Enable when this
jumper is removed.
7 Built-in EtherNet/IP(1) Connectors EtherNet/IP network cable connections.
8 TB1 I/O terminal block. See Table 20 and Table 21 for details.
9 DPI Port 2 Terminal block connector for the mini-DIN cable. The mini-DIN is
used for handheld and remote HIM options.
10 Door Switch Connector Power supply for the door switch. See Table 22 for details.
11 Edge Connectors The XT main control circuit boards have PolySi PST-576 dielectric
grease applied to the edge connectors.
Important: When handling circuit boards with grease:
• Do not touch or remove the grease
• Do not allow the grease to become contaminated
If necessary, an edge connector grease applicator kit, catalog
number SK-RM-GRAPP1, is available to re-apply grease to edge
connectors on circuit boards.
(1) See the PowerFlex Drives with TotalFORCE Control Built-in EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM009.

Chapter 4
Table 20 - TB1 I/O Terminal Block Designations

Fixed I/O Terminal Name Description
Di 0ac Digital Input 0 Connections for AC power supply.
Di 0ac
120V AC (132V AC Max.) High State: 100…132V AC
Di C Low State: 0…30V AC
Di 0dc 10 mA maximum
+24V
24VC Di C Digital Input Common Digital input common

Di 0dc Digital Input 0 Connections for DC power supply.
24V DC (30V DC Max.) High State: 20…24V DC
Low State: 0…5V DC
9 mA maximum
+24V +24 Volt Power Connections for drive supplied 24V power.
150 mA maximum
24VC 24 Volt Common
Table 21 - TB1 I/O Terminal Block Specifications

Name Wire Size Range Torque Strip
Length
Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended
755T control module TB1 2.5 mm2 0.3 mm2 0.25 N•m 0.2 N•m 6 mm
(14 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb•in) (1.8 lb•in) (0.24 in.)
Table 22 - Door Switch Specification

Name Description
P9 Connection for door switch.
5 mA maximum

Chapter 4
Hardware Enable Circuitry Each main control board has one digital input. Digital Input 0 can be used as a
general-purpose programmable input, or by removal of a jumper, it can be
configured as a dedicated hardware enable, which is unaffected by parameter
settings.
• PowerFlex 755T - Digital Input 0 is found on TB1
To configure Digital Input 0 as a dedicated hardware enable, complete the

following steps.
1. Access the control pod as described beginning on page 161.

2. Locate and remove ENABLE Jumper on the Main Control Board (see
diagram).
Figure 70 - ENABLE Jumper Location
Series A Main Control Circuit Board Shown
IMPORTANT Change main control circuit board configurations only when the control pod
is de-energized.

Chapter 4
Safety Enable Circuitry The drive ships with the safety enable jumper (SAFETY) installed. This
jumper must be removed when using the safe torque off or speed monitoring
safety options.
IMPORTANT Failure to remove the jumper when using either safety option causes the
drive to fault when a start command is issued.
Figure 71 - SAFETY Jumper Location
Series A Main Control Circuit Board Shown
IMPORTANT Change main control circuit board configurations only when the control pod
is de-energized.

Chapter 4
Managing Fiber-optic PowerFlex 755T products use fiber-optic cables to make the communication
connections between the control pod and the power modules. The integrity of
Cabling these connections is essential for reliable product performance. Therefore,
careful handling of the fiber-optic cables is required.
Each fiber-optic cable is connected at the factory to a transceiver board which

is connect to the fiber interface board in the control pod. Each cable is labeled
with the number of its corresponding power module. Each cable connects to
the CTL port of its corresponding power module. The cable and power
module assignments must be maintained. Fiber-optic cables are not
interchangeable.
Bend Radius Limit

Over bending fiber-optic cables can damage them. Be sure to observe the bend
radius limit when routing or coiling the cables.

decreased.
Securing Cables
Careful routing of fiber-optic cables is needed to keep the cable runs neat and
organized to help avoid entanglements and pinch hazards.
To manage cable runs, utilize the clips and guides provided in the product as
well as customer supplied cable ties.
Maintain a smooth shallow radius whenever possible.
Use cable ties to create strain reliefs and secure coils.
Clips are provided to secure bundles of cables.
Cable guides help to organize and separate cables.

Chapter 4
Fiber-optic Connections Fiber-optic cables are routed and connected at the factory in frame 8 and 9
drives and frame 8…10 bus supplies. These cables connect the fiber interface
circuit board to the line side converters and motor side inverters in the adjacent
enclosures. See Figure 58 on page 141.
IMPORTANT Do not remove protective covers from unused wire harnesses, circuit board
connectors, terminal blocks, and fiber-optic ports. Removing a protective
cover can lead to contamination.
Control Pod to Power Module Connections

Fiber-optic cables at the control pod plug into transceiver modules that are
mounted to a transceiver board. Transceiver boards plug into an edge
connector on the fiber interface board. Inspect these connections at
installation. Re-seating these connections after shipping and handling or after
extended storage is recommended.
Fiber-optic Interface Circuit Board
Transceiver boards plug into the

fiber interface board. Verify that
these connections are secure.
Fully insert fiber-optic cable plugs into the

transceiver. Insert the transceiver into the
connector cage until you hear it click into place.
Do Not Touch
Transceiver Board Greased Connector
Power Module
Remove protective
Fiber-optic cables routed from the control pod

plug into the CTL transceiver cages that are
mounted on the power layer interface boards
located behind the power module access panel.
Power Layer Interface Board

Chapter 4
Fiber-optic Interface Board
The fiber-optic interface board holds the fiber transceiver circuit boards. See
page 172 for a fiber-optic connection example.
ACP0 L0 L1
ACP1/TAM
M0
M1
L8 M2
L6 M4
L4 M6
L2 M8
L3 M9
L5 M7
L7 M5
L9 M3
Table 23 - Fiber Transceiver Circuit Board Connections

Port Name Description
ACP0 Fiber transceiver port for the fiber-optic connection from ACP0 on the AC precharge control board.
ACP1/TAM Fiber transceiver port for the fiber-optic connection from ACP1 (frame 13 and larger) or TAM on the
torque accuracy module
L0…L9 Fiber transceiver ports for the fiber-optic connections from CTL on the power layer interface board in
power modules that are used as line side converters.
M0…M9 Fiber transceiver ports for the fiber-optic connections from CTL on the power layer interface board in
power modules that are used as motor side inverters.
Each fiber-optic cable connects to its designated CTL port on the power
module power layer interface circuit board. See Figure 54 on page 130.

Chapter 4
Figure 72 - Fiber Interface to CTL Port Connections

Shipping Splits
L0-CTL and L1-CTL connections L2-CTL…L9-CTL Connections M0-CTL…M9-CTL Connections

are made at the factory.

Chapter 4
Working with one or two cables at a time, pull the cable down the power
control channel until it reaches its corresponding power module.
Power Control Channel
Cable Guides
Use the cable guides provided to help organize the cables and keep them
straight.

Chapter 4
Route cables for the right-to-left oriented cabinets through the grommet
between the entry wire bays in back-to-back configurations.
Power Control Channels
Back-to-Back
Grommet Entry Wire Bays
Secure cables here with cable ties.

Chapter 4
Route cables out of the power control channel and into the corresponding
power module.
800 mm (31.5 in.) power bay

(converter) shown.
Front panels omitted to show detail.
Plug the cables into the CTL transceiver port on the power layer interface
board.

Chapter 4
Fiber-optic Cable Routing by Fiber-optic cables are routed through the power control channel to the line side
(Ln) converter power modules and motor side (Mn) inverter power modules.
Frame Size
Table 24 - Fiber-optic Cable Routing Drawing Index
Product Description Page
755TL and 755TR Drives Frame 7 Drive Fiber-optic Cable Routing 177
Frame 8 Drive Fiber-optic Cable Routing 178
755TR Drives Frame 11 Drive Fiber-optic Cable Routing 182
755TM Bus Supplies Frame 7 Bus Supply Fiber-optic Cable Routing 177
Frame 8 Bus Supply Fiber-optic Cable Routing 178
755TM Common Bus Frame 8 Common Bus Inverter Fiber-optic Cable Routing 179
Inverters
Frame 9 Common Bus Inverter Fiber-optic Cable Routing 180

Chapter 4
Figure 73 - Frame 7 Drive Fiber-optic Cable Routing

ACP0 L0
TAM M0
TAM ACP0
F0 L0 M0
Fiber Transceiver Port Cabinet Top View
Connection Cable Length Cat. No.

Fiber Transceiver Port to Device mm (in.)
F0 to L0-PDI 1500 (59) 20-750-MFOC-1K5
ACP0 to AC precharge control board 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
L0 to L0-CTL 2000 (79) 20-750-MFOC-2K0
M0 to M0-CTL 2000 (79) 20-750-MFOC-2K0
ACP1/TAM to TAM module circuit board (Optional) 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
Figure 74 - Frame 7 Bus Supply Fiber-optic Cable Routing

ACP0 L0
ACP0
F0 L0

F0 to L0-PDI 1500 (59) 20-750-MFOC-1K5
ACP0 to AC precharge control board 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
L0 to L0-CTL 2000 (79) 20-750-MFOC-2K0

Chapter 4

Left-to-Right
ACP0 L0 Orientation Depicted
TAM M0
ACP0 TAM
F0 L0 M0
Connection Left-to-Right Orientation Right-to-Left Orientation

Fiber Transceiver Port to Device Cable Length Cat. No. Cable Length Cat. No.
mm (in.) mm (in.)
F0 to L0-PDI 1300 (51) 20-750-MFOC-1K3 1300 (51) 20-750-MFOC-1K3
ACP0 to AC precharge control board 1500 (59) 20-750-MFOC-1K5 1500 (59) 20-750-MFOC-1K5
L0 to L0-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
M0 to M0-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
ACP1/TAM to TAM module circuit board 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
(Optional)

Left-to-Right
ACP0 L0 Orientation Depicted
ACP0
F0 L0

mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4
Figure 77 - Frame 8 Common Bus Inverter Fiber-optic Cable Routing
TAM M0
TAM
M0

M0 (First control pod) to M0-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M0 (Second control pod) to M0-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
ACP1/TAM (First control pod) to TAM module circuit board (Optional) 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
ACP1/TAM (Second control pod) to TAM module circuit board 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
(Optional)

Left-to-Right
ACP0 L0 L1 Orientation Depicted
TAM M0 M1
TAM
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 M0 M1

mm (in.) mm (in.)
(Optional)

Chapter 4

Left-to-Right
ACP0 L0 F0 L1

mm (in.) mm (in.)
TAM M0 M1
TAM
M0 M1

(Optional)

Chapter 4

Left-to-Right
TAM M0 M1
Shipping Split
TAM
L2
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 F2 L2 M0 M1 M2
M2 Factory Connections Field Connections
Fiber Transceiver Ports
Left Section Right Section
Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)
F0 to L0-PDI, F2 to L2-PDI 1300 (51) 20-750-MFOC-1K3 1300 (51) 20-750-MFOC-1K3
(Optional)

Left-to-Right
L2
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 F2 L2
Fiber Transceiver Ports Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4
TAM M0 M1
TAM
M2
M0 M1 M2

M0 (Second control pod to M0-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
M1 (Second control pod to M1-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
(Optional)

Left-to-Right
TAM M0 M1
Shipping Split
TAM
L2…L3
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 M0 M1 M2 M3
M2…M3 Factory Connections Field Connections

Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)
(Optional)

Chapter 4

Left-to-Right
Shipping Split
L2…L3
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3
Factory Connections Field Connections

Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)
TAM M0 M1
TAM
M2
M0 M1 M2 M3
M3
Table 25 - Frame 11 Common Bus Inverter Fiber-optic Cables

(Optional)

Chapter 4

Left-to-Right
TAM M0 M1
Shipping Splits
TAM
L2…L4
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 F4 L4 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4
Left Section Center Section Right Section
Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)
(Optional)

Chapter 4

Left-to-Right
Shipping Split
L2…L4
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 F4 L4
Factory Connections Field Connections

Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)
TAM M0 M1
TAM
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4
M2…M4
Control Pod Cabinet Top View

(Optional)

Chapter 4

Field Connections Back-to-Back Configuration
ACP0 L0 L1 ACP1 L3 F3 L4 L5 F5 M3 M4 M5
ACP1 M0 M1
L2…L5
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 F2 L2 M0 M1 M2
M2…M5 Shipping Splits Factory Connections Field Connections
M5 M4 M3 F5 L5 L4 F3 L3 ACP1 ACP0 L0 F0 L1 F2 L2 M0 M1 M2
Field Connections Factory Connections Field Connections
Section 5 of 6 Section 4 of 6
Section 1 of 7 Section 2 of 7 Section 3 of 7 Section 4 of 7 Section 5 of 7 Section 6 of 7 Section 7 of 7
Cabinet Top View
Connection Back-to-Back Configuration In-Line Configuration

mm (in.) mm (in.)
ACP1/TAM to AC precharge control board 2700 (106) 20-750-MFOC-2K7 4000 (157) 20-750-MFOC-4K0

Chapter 4

ACP1 L3 F3 L4 L5 F5
ACP0 L0 L1
ACP1
L2…L5
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 F2 L2
Shipping Splits Factory Connections
Fiber Transceiver Ports In-Line Configuration
F5 L5 L4 F3 L3 ACP1 ACP0 L0 F0 L1 F2 L2
Field Connections Factory Connections
Section 3 of 4
Section 2 of 4
Section 3 of 3 Section 2 of 3 Section 1 of 3
Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4

Field Connections
M3 M4 M5 Section 2 of 3
TAM M0 M1
TAM
Section 3 of 3
M0 M1 M2 Section 1 of 3
M2…M5 Factory Connections Shipping Splits

Cabinet Top View

M0 to M0-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M1 to M1-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M2 to M2-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M3 to M3-CTL 4000 (157) 20-750-MFOC-4K0
M4 to M4-CTL 4600 (181) 20-750-MFOC-4K6
M5 to M5-CTL 4600 (181) 20-750-MFOC-4K6

Chapter 4

ACP0 L0 L1 ACP1 L4 F4 L5 L6 F6 L7 M4 M5 M6 M7
ACP1 M0 M1
L2…L7
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 M0 M1 M2 M3
Shipping Splits
M7 M6 M5 M4 L7 F6 L6 L5 F4 L4 ACP1 ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 M0 M1 M2 M3
Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4

ACP0 L0 L1 ACP1 L4 F4 L5 L6 F6 L7
ACP1
L2…L7
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3
Shipping Splits Factory Connections Field Connections
L7 F6 L6 L5 F4 L4 ACP1 ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3
Section 1 of 5 Section 2 of 5 Section 3 of 5 Section 4 of 5 Section 5 of 5
Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4

Field Connections
Section 2 of 3
M4 M5 M6 M7
TAM M0 M1
TAM Section 3 of 3
M0 M1 M2 M3 Section 1 of 3

M0 to M0-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M1 to M1-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M2 to M2-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
M3 to M3-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
M4 to M4-CTL 5400 (213) 20-750-MFOC-5K4
M5 to M5-CTL 5400 (213) 20-750-MFOC-5K4
M6 to M6-CTL 4600 (181) 20-750-MFOC-4K6
M7 to M7-CTL 4600 (181) 20-750-MFOC-4K6

Chapter 4

ACP0 L0 L1 ACP1 L5 F5 L6 L7 F7 L8 L9 F9 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9
ACP1 M0 M1
L2…L9
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 F4 L4 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4
M2…M9
M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 F9 L9 L8 F7 L7 L6 F5 L5 ACP1 ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 F4 L4 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4
Section 5 of 8 Section 6 of 8 Section 7 of 8 Section 8 of 8
Section 1 of 8 Section 2 of 8 Section 3 of 8 Section 4 of 8


mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4

ACP0 L0 L1 ACP1 L5 F5 L6 L7 F7 L8 L9 F9
ACP1
L2…L9
ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F L3 F4 L4
F9 L9 L8 F7 L7 L6 F5 L5 ACP1 ACP0 L0 F0 L1 L2 F2 L3 F4 L4
Section 1 of 5 Section 2 of 5 Section 3 of 5 Section 4 of 5 Section 5 of 5
Cabinet Top View

mm (in.) mm (in.)

Chapter 4

Field Connections
Section 2 of 3
M5 M6 M7 M8 M9
TAM M0 M1
TAM Section 3 of 3
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 Section 1 of 3

M0 to M0-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M1 to M1-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M2 to M2-CTL 2200 (87) 20-750-MFOC-2K2
M3 to M3-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
M4 to M4-CTL 3200 (126) 20-750-MFOC-3K2
M5 to M5-CTL 4600 (181) 20-750-MFOC-4K6
M6 to M6-CTL 4600 (181) 20-750-MFOC-4K6
M7 to M7-CTL 5400 (213) 20-750-MFOC-5K4
M8 to M8-CTL 5400 (213) 20-750-MFOC-5K4
M9 to M9-CTL 5400 (213) 20-750-MFOC-5K4

Chapter 5
Power Wiring
Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every precaution
must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be
read and understood before the actual installation begins.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper

installation. Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility for the
compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise
for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of
personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during
installation.
AC Supply Source PowerFlex® 755T drives and bus supplies are suitable for use on a circuit
capable of delivering up to a maximum of 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes at
Considerations 400/480V and 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600/690V.
PowerFlex 755T drives and bus supplies must not be used on undersized or
high-impedance supply systems. The supply system kVA must be equal to or
greater than the product-related kW, and the system impedance must be less
than 10%. Operation outside these limits can cause instability and product
shutdown.
System Impedance = (PowerFlex 755T kVA ÷ Transformer kVA) x Transformer % Impedance
You must account for the kVA of all PowerFlex 755T drives and bus supplies
on the distribution system and the system impedance of upstream
transformers.
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage

that is caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection, use only the
recommended line fuses/circuit breakers that are specified in the Fuses and
Circuit Breakers section on page 228.
If a Residual Current Detector (RCD) is used as a ground fault monitor, use

only Type B (adjustable) devices to avoid nuisance tripping.
Motor Considerations Due to the operational characteristics of AC variable frequency drives, motors
with inverter grade insulation systems designed to meet or exceed NEMA
MG1 Part 31.40.4.2 standards for resistance to spikes of 1600 volts are
recommended.
Guidelines must be followed when using non-inverter grade motors to avoid

premature motor failures. Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse
Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001 for
recommendations.

Chapter 5
Grounding Requirements The safety ground-PE must be connected to system ground. Ground
impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all ground
connections should be periodically checked.
Recommended Grounding Scheme

These diagrams show products connected to a solid ground single point (PE
only) power source. Some applications may require alternate grounding
schemes, refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001, for more
information. These applications include installations with long distances
between drives or drive line-ups, which could cause large potential differences
between the drive or line-up grounds.
For installations within a cabinet, a single safety ground point or ground bus
bar connected directly to building steel should be used. All circuits including
the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and
directly to this point/bar.
Figure 99 - Typical Grounding—Frames 5 and 6
R (L1) U (T1)
S (L2) V (T2)
T (L3) W (T3)
PE
SHLD
Figure 100 - Typical Grounding—Frame 7
PE PE
U (T1)
PE PE V (T2)
W (T3)
R (L1)
S (L2) SHLD
T (L3)

Chapter 5
Figure 101 - Typical Grounding—Frames 8…15
A B C D E
DC Bus Conditioner See Note (1)

DC Bus
Control Bus
AC Bus
Do Not Remove
DC Bus Conditioner
PE Ground Wire
Entry Wire Entry Wire Input Bay Power Bay Power Bay Power Bay Exit Wire and
Bay Bay DC Voltage
Balance Bay
AC Bus AC Output
Do Not Remove Do Not Remove

PE PE
PE Ground
To Line PE
R (L1) (Input)
S (L2) U (T1)
T (L3) V (T2)
R (L1) W (T3)
S (L2)
T (L3)
Shield
To Line PE
(Output)
Frame 13 In-Line configuration Branch circuit devices and
shown. Right-to-Left cabinets remote disconnect as required LCL Filter Module and Power
are not shown for clarity. by local electrical codes. Module PE Ground Connections
A B C D E
Frames 13…15 Frames 10…15 Frames 8…15 Frames 10…15 Frames 8…15
(Entry wire bay is optional for frames (Exit wire bay is optional for frames
10…12.) 8…12.)
Entry Wire Bay to Entry Wire Bay Entry Wire Bay to Input Bay Input Bay to Power Bay Power Bay to Power Bay Power Bay to Exit Wire Bay
In-Line Configuration In-Line Configuration All Configurations All Configurations In-Line Configuration
• Joined at factory • Joined at installation • Joined at factory • Joined at installation • Joined at installation
• DC bus is spliced • AC bus is not spliced • AC bus bar is spliced • AC bus bar is spliced • AC bus bar is not present
• Control bus is not spliced • DC bus is spliced • DC bus bar is spliced • DC bus bar is spliced • DC bus bar is spliced
• AC input bus bar is not spliced • Control bus is spliced • Control bus is spliced • Control bus is spliced • Control bus is spliced
• PE ground bar is not spliced • AC input bus bar is spliced • AC input bus bars are not spliced • AC input or AC output bus bar is • AC output bus bar is spliced
• PE ground bar is spliced • PE ground bar is not spliced not present • PE ground bar is spliced
Back-to-Back Configuration • PE ground bar is spliced
• Joined at factory Back-to-Back Configuration Important: An electrical connection Power Bay to Exit Wire Bay and
• DC bus is not spliced • Joined at installation between the PE ground bus bars in DC Voltage Balance Bay
• Control bus is not spliced • AC bus is not spliced these cabinets is not allowed. Do not Back-to-Back Configuration
• AC input bus bar is not spliced • DC bus is spliced remove the factory-installed bus bar • Joined at installation
• PE ground bar is not spliced • Control bus is spliced components that are designed to • AC bus bar is not present
• AC input bus bar is spliced help prevent such a connection. PE • DC bus bar is spliced
Important: All required electrical • PE ground bar is spliced ground integrity is maintained • Control bus is spliced
connections between the entry wire between the input bay and power • AC output bus bar is spliced
bays are made at the factory. No bay by the factory-installed • PE ground bar is spliced
additional connections are to be hardware that is used to join the
made at installation. Do not remove cabinets.
any factory-installed bus bar
components that are designed to
help prevent such connections.
(1) DC Bus Conditioners - All DC bus conditioners are connected to the PE ground bar with a single ground wire and clamp. The number of DC bus conditioners that are installed depends on input
voltage class, any selected power option (-P50 or -P51), and the AC supply ground scheme.

Chapter 5
Grounding Clamps
The clamp kits listed in this table can be used to secure round copper ground
conductors to 9.5 mm (0.37 in.) thick ground bus bars.
Kit Catalog Number Conductor Cross-sections

ISO (mm2) AWG/MCM Tightening Torque N•m (lb•in)
SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-16 2.5…16 14…6 AWG 3 (27)
SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-50 16…50 6…0 AWG 8 (71)
SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-75 35…75 2…00 AWG 12 (106)
SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-185 70…185 00 AWG …350 MCM 15 (133)
The final assembly Safety Ground-PE must be connected to system ground.

Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local
industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. Periodically check the
integrity of all ground connections. For more information on grounding
requirements, see PowerFlex 755TM IP00/Open Type Kits Installation
Instructions, publication 750-IN101, and Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001.
Shield Termination—SHLD
The shield terminal provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. The
motor cable shield terminal must be connected to an earth ground by a
separate continuous lead. Connect the motor cable shield to this terminal on
the drive end and the motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or
EMI clamp to connect shield to this terminal.
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter Grounding

Using an optional RFI filters can result in relatively high ground leakage
currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with
grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly
grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Be sure that
the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same
building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible
cables and must exclude any form of plug or socket that would permit
inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes can require redundant ground
connections. Periodically check the integrity of all connections. See the
instructions that are supplied with the filter.

Chapter 5
Power Cable Specifications A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For an in-depth
discussion of cable types, including a table of maximum motor cable lengths,
refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001.
Power Cable Types Acceptable for 400…690 Volt Installations

ATTENTION: National codes and standards (NEC, BSI, and so forth) and local
codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment.
Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor
sizes, branch circuit protection, and disconnect devices. Failure to do so can
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Table 26 - Power Cable Recommendations

Type Cable Description Min. Insulation Rating
Input Standard All frame sizes: 600V,
Power (1)(2) • Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. 75 °C (167 °F) (3)
• Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and
Motor Standard tinned copper drain wire, three drain wires per cable 400…600V systems:
assembly. 600V, 75 °C (167 °F)
• PVC jacket. 690V systems:
Frame 5 2000V, 90 °C (194 °F)
• Maximum 35.0 mm2 (2 AWG) conductors.
Frame 6
• Maximum 350 MCM conductors.
Frame 7
• Maximum 350 MCM dual conductor per phase.
• Maximum 500 MCM single conductor per phase.
Frames 8…15
• Maximum 500 MCM conductors.
(1) Signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3 meters (1 foot).
(2) The use of shielded wire for AC input power may not be necessary but is always recommended.
(3) The minimum insulation rating for input power wire must be at least equal to the nominal system voltage rating.
Power Cable Connections— Observe the specifications listed in this section for AC line input power and
output motor cable connections.
Frames 5 and 6
Table 27 - Frame 5 Power Cable Connections
Frame Wire Size Range (1)(2) Strip Length Recommended Recommended Tool
Torque
Maximum Minimum
5 35.0 mm2 2.5 mm2 18.0 mm 5.0 N•m 0.35 in. Flat Screwdriver
(2 AWG) (14 AWG) (0.7 in.) (44.3 lb•in)
(1) Maximum/minimum wire sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.
(2) Terminal blocks are designed to accept a single wire.
Table 28 - Frame 6 Power Cable Connections

Frame Maximum Lug Width (1) Recommended Terminal Bolt Size Recommended Tool
Torque
6 34.6 mm (1.36 in.) 11.3 N•m (100 lb•in) M8 x 1.25 13 mm hex socket
(1) Lugs are not supplied.

Chapter 5
Table 29 - Frame 5 and 6 PE Grounding Stud Connections

Frame Recommended Torque Terminal Bolt/Screw Size Recommended Tool
5 3.4 N•m (30 lb•in) M6 10 mm hex socket
6 11.3 N•m (100 lb•in) M8 13 mm hex socket
Power Cable Connections— AC line and motor cables fitted with barrel lugs connect directly to the bus bar
or to L-brackets as indicated in this table.
Frames 7…15
Connection Type Cabinet Frames L-Brackets Included (1)
AC Line Input Power Bay 7 No
Input Bay 8…12 No
Entry Wire Bay 10…12 (P16 Option) Yes
13…15 (Included) Yes
Motor Output Power Bay 8…12 No
Exit Wire Bay 8 (P15 Option) No
9…12 (P15 Option) Yes
13…15 (In-Line) Yes
Voltage Balance Bay 13…15 (Back-to-Back) Yes
(1) If an application requires additional L-brackets, kit number 20-750-MLBRKT-F8M is available. Each kit contains three L-brackets
and mounting hardware.
UL Listed Barrel Lugs

Use UL Listed barrel lugs to make AC line input power and output motor
connections to busbars and L-brackets.
• Barrel lugs are customer-supplied.
• Use only copper barrel lugs with tin or zinc plating.
• Barrel lugs can be either crimp or mechanical type.
• Use the vendor-recommended tooling to fasten crimp type terminals to
cabling.
• Torque mechanical type terminals according to vendor instructions.
• Barrel lugs must have the dimensions in the following graphic.
Figure 102 - UL-Listed Barrel Lug Dimensions
Ø 12.7 mm
(0.5 in.)
44.5 mm
(1.75 in.)

Chapter 5
Bus Bar Connections
AC line input power and output motor cables with appropriate barrel lugs that
are connected directly to bus bars use the fastening hardware provided. Keep
the wire connections at least 51 mm (2 in.) away from the ends of the slotted
bus bar.
Fastening hardware can be inserted into the channel of slotted bus bar through
the notched area in the center of the bus bar, if provided, or at the end of the
bus bar.
Frame 7 Cable Connections

Use the supplied M10 fastening hardware.
M10
T45
38 N•m (336 lb•in)
Frame 8 Cable Connections

Customer-supplied M12 hardware.
M12
19 mm
38 N•m (336 lb•in)
51 mm
(2 in.)
51 mm
(2 in.)
Insert the supplied fastening hardware into the bus bar channel
at the center notch, if accessible, or at the end of the bus bar.
M10
15 mm
38 N•m (336 lb•in)

Chapter 5
Power Terminal L-Bracket Connections
Power cable connections in entry and exit wire bays are made using L-brackets.
The M10 hardware that is required to fasten the L-brackets to the slotted bus
bar is provided. Wires with appropriate barrel lugs can be bolted to both sides
of the L-brackets if necessary. Up to four conductors can be attached to each L-
bracket. Attach the conductors to the L-brackets using M12 or 0.5 in. diameter
bolts, nuts, and washers. Bellville spring washers, or equivalent, are
recommended. Keep the L-bracket connections at least 51 mm (2 in.) away
from the ends of the slotted bus bar.
AC line input power and output motor cables with appropriate barrel lugs can
be bolted to both sides of the L-brackets with M12 hardware supplied by the
customer. The M10 hardware that is required to fasten the L-brackets to the
slotted bus bar is provided. Wires with appropriate barrel lugs can be bolted to
both sides of the L-brackets if necessary. Up to four conductors can be attached
to each L-bracket. Attach the conductors to the L-brackets using M12 or 0.5
in. diameter bolts, nuts, and washers. Bellville spring washers, or equivalent, are
recommended. Keep the L-bracket connections at least 51 mm (2 in.) away
from the ends of the slotted bus bar.
51 mm
(2 in.)
51 mm
(2 in.)
Cable Connections
Customer-supplied M12 hardware.
M10
15 mm
M12 38 N•m (336 lb•in)
19 mm
38 N•m (336 lb•in)

Chapter 5
Additional Power Terminal L-Brackets
PowerFlex 755T entry and exit wire bays come equipped with L-brackets. If an
application requires additional L-brackets, kit number 20-750-MLBRKT-
F8M is available. Each kit contains three L-brackets and mounting hardware.
Figure 103 - L-Bracket Approximate Dimensions

110.0 mm
(4.33 in.)
25.5 mm 46.0 mm
(1.04 in.) (1.81 in.)
85.1 mm
(3.35 in.)
44.5 mm
(1.75 in.)
17.8 mm Ø11.0 mm
(0.70 in.) (0.43 in.)
When using mechanical barrel lugs, which may be large, be sure to maintain
adequate spacing to adjacent wires, terminals, and other parts.
Figure 104 - Typical Barrel Lug Connection to L-Bracket Options
Left Side Right Side Both Sides - Up to four lugs.

Chapter 5
Recommended Cable Spacing PowerFlex 755T products require multiple conductors in parallel. Wire size
and number of conductors must be determined by the customer based on drive
rated current, local codes, operating conditions, and specific application needs.
When using multiple conductors per phase, symmetrical spacing of the input
and output power cabling over the span of the bus bar for each phase is
required.
When using multiple conductors per phase, wires must be arranged so that
each conduit, bundle, or cable contains equal numbers of conductors from all
three phases.
Figure 105 - Spacing Examples
5.1 mm 5.1 mm
(2.0 in.) (2.0 in.)
Maintain Maintain
clearance at clearance at
each end of the Evenly space conductors along the length of the bus bar. each end of the
bus bar. bus bar.
5.1 mm 5.1 mm
(2.0 in.) (2.0 in.)

Chapter 5
Figure 106 - Recommended Cable Spacing Example—1000 mm (39.4 in.) Wire Input Bay

Chapter 5
Figure 107 - Recommended L-bracket Spacing Example—800 mm (31.5 in.) Wire Bay
One phase of input power connections shown for clarity.

Chapter 5
Power Terminal and Bus Bar Figure 108 - Frame 5 Drives
Locations
2.5 mm
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in)
4x
24V
Shunt
Trip
2 3 4 5 6

1 24V+, GND 24V input terminals.
ST-NC, ST-NO, ST-T Shunt trip terminals. See page 217 for wiring examples.
2 PE grounding stud Termination point to chassis ground for AC line shield
3 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power terminals
4 DC+, DC- DC bus terminals
5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC output motor terminals
6 PE grounding stud Termination point to chassis ground for motor shield
7 SHLD Termination points for control wire shields and drain wires

Chapter 5
2.5 mm
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in)
8x
1 6
2 3 4 5
5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC output motor terminals
7 ST-NC, ST-NO, ST-T Shunt trip terminals. See page 217 for wiring examples.
24V+, GND 24V input terminals.

Chapter 5
4
6

1 PE grounding bar Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line and motor shield.
PE ground bar clamps, kit number SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-nn, are available.
2 Power bus R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power connections
3 Testpoints DC+, DC- and R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 voltage testpoint sockets.
Always replace the protective caps on the testpoints if present.
4 DC bus DC+, DC-
5 Power bus U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 motor connections
6 Nameplate Power module and LCL filter module nameplate locations

Chapter 5
Figure 111 - Frame 8 and 9 Drives
2
3
7
5 5
PE
Frame 8 drive shown.

1 AC link Connects AC circuit breaker to LCL fuse assembly
3 Control bus 120/240V and 24V AC control power supply connections 5
4 Input power bus R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power connections
5 Motor power bus U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 motor connections
6 PE grounding bar Chassis ground termination point for incoming AC line and motor shield. Frame 9
PE ground bar clamps, kit number SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-nn, are available to
make these connections.

Chapter 5
Figure 112 - Frames 10…15 Drives
4 6
PE PE PE PE
7
Frame 10 drive shown. Layout is typical for Frames 10…15.
3
5 1
8
2
Item Name Description Item Name Description

1 AC bus AC power supply 5 Control bus 120/240V and 24V AC control power supply connections
2 DC bus DC+, DC- 6 Power bus U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 motor connections
3 Testpoints DC+, DC- and R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 voltage testpoint sockets. 7 PE grounding Chassis ground termination point for incoming AC line and motor
Always replace the protective caps on the testpoints if present. bar shield. PE ground bar clamps, kit number SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-nn,
are available to make these connections.
Optional entry wiring bay comes with hardware to splice together
the PE grounding bars between the wiring bay and input bay.
4 Power bus R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power connections 8 Nameplate Power module and LCL filter module nameplate locations

Chapter 5
Figure 113 - Frame 6 Bus Supplies
2.5 mm
2.6 N•m (23 lb•in)
8x
1 5
2 3 4

6 ST-NC, ST-NO, ST-T Shunt trip terminals. See page 217 for wiring examples.
24V+, GND 24V input terminals.

Chapter 5
Figure 114 - Frame 7 Bus Supplies
4
5

1 PE grounding bar Terminating point to chassis ground for incoming AC line and motor shield.
2 Power bus R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power connections
4 DC bus DC+, DC-

Chapter 5
Figure 115 - Frames 8…15 Bus Supplies
1 2
3
4
4
6
8
PE
7
Frame 8 bus supply shown.
2
6
3
4
6
PE PE PE
7
Frame 10 bus supply shown. Layout is typical for Frames 10 through 15.
Item Name Description Item Name Description

1 AC link Connects AC circuit breaker to LCL fuse assembly 5 Power bus R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power connections
2 AC bus AC power supply 6 Control bus 120/240V and 24V AC control power supply connections
3 DC bus DC+, DC- 7 PE grounding Chassis ground termination point for incoming AC line and motor
bar shield. PE ground bar clamps, kit number SK-RM-GRNDCLMP-nn,
are available.
Optional entry wiring bay comes with hardware to splice together
the PE grounding bars between the wiring bay and input bay.
4 Testpoints DC+, DC- and R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 voltage testpoint sockets. 8 Nameplate Power module and LCL filter module nameplate locations

Chapter 5
Figure 116 - Frames 8…15 Common Bus Inverters
2
5
6
PE
4
Frame 8 Frame 10 (Layout is typical for Frames 9…15)

1 DC bus DC power supply
2 Control bus Control power supply
3 Power bus U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 motor connections
4 PE grounding bar Termination point to chassis ground for incoming AC line and motor shield.

Chapter 5
Figure 117 - Optional Entry and Exit Wire Bays
4 4
PE PE
4
400 mm (15.7 in.) 800 mm (31.5 in.)

1 DC bus DC power supply
2 Control bus Control power supply
3 Power bus R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input power connections (entry wire bay)
or
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 motor connections (exit wire bay)
4 PE grounding bar Termination pointTermination point to chassis ground for incoming AC line and motor
shield.

Chapter 5
Shunt Trip Wiring—Frames 5 Because frame 5 and 6 drives and bus supplies do not have main input power
control, a shunt trip feature is provided. An LCL capacitor failure triggers a
and 6 code 14112 ‘Capacitor Fault’ and the shunt trip relay output on the power
feedback board closes. This action trips the upstream main supply contactor or
circuit breaker and removes the failed capacitor from the main AC input.
IMPORTANT It is recommended that frame 5 and 6 drive and bus supply installations
include the shunt trip circuit.
Figure 118 - Shunt Trip Wiring Examples
Customer- Customer- Customer- Coil

Supplied Supplied Supplied
Contactors M1 Contactors M1 Circuit Breaker
Fuses 24V (1) Fuses 24V (1) Fuses 24V (1)

Common Common Common
VFD VFD VFD

ST-NO ST-NO ST-NO
ST-T ST-T ST-T
ST-NC ST-NC ST-NC
M1 K1
K1
M1
M M M
(1) Customer-supplied 24V power for optional external devices.

Chapter 5
Input and Output Power The information contained in this section provides strict guidance for input
and output power sources and wiring for frame 13…15 products. Use the tables
Wiring Applications— and diagrams in this section to verify that your product and application meets
Frames 13…15 these requirements.
Table 30 - Frames 13…15 Drives Power Wiring Requirements
Power Source Configuration Rule
AC Input In-Line or Two entry wiring bays (WB) must be used for independent three-phase AC input power connections (AC Input-1 and AC Input-2).
Back-to-Back
AC Input-1 and AC Input-2 must have the same power source and phase sequence.
The cable length and impedance from the AC power source to AC Input-1 and AC Input-2 must be the same.
DC Bus In-Line Must be continuous.
Back-to-Back A single balance connection must be provided at the motor end of the shared DC bus.
AC Output In-Line or Two exit wiring bays (WB) or one DC voltage balance bay (DCVBB) must be used for independent three-phase AC output power connections (AC Output-1 and
Back-to-Back AC Output-2).
Motor cables (Motor Cable-1 and Motor Cable-2) from the AC output connections (AC Output-1 and AC Output-2), respectively, to the motor must be the same
length and impedance.
Both sets of motor cables (Motor Cable-1 and Motor Cable-2) must be connected to a single motor only.
Figure 119 - Frame 13…15 Drive, In-Line Configuration Power Wiring Diagram
Frame 13 Drive Shown
R/L1 R/L1
S/L2 S/L2
T/L3 T/L3
+DC +DC
-DC -DC
WB M5 M4 M3 F5 L5 L4 F3 L3 IB WB WB IB L0 F0 L1 F2 L2 M0 M1 M2 WB
Pod
U/T1 R/L1 R/L1 U/T1

V/T2 S/L2 S/L2 V/T2
W/T3 T/L3 T/L3 W/T3
3-Phase 3-Phase 3-Phase 3-Phase

AC Output-2 3 AC Input-2 AC Input-1 3 AC Output-1
Motor Cable-2 Motor Cable-1
Motor

Chapter 5
Figure 120 - Frame 13…15 Drive, Back-to-Back Configuration Power Wiring Diagram
Frame 13 Drive Shown R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+DC
-DC
DC Voltage
Balance
WB IB L3 F3 L4 L5 F5 M3 M4 M5 DCVBB
3-Phase
3-Phase R/L1
S/L2
U/T1
V/T2
AC Output-2
AC Input-2 T/L3 W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3 3 Motor Cable-2
+DC
-DC
Motor
WB IB L0 F0 L1 F2 L2 M0 M1 M2 DCVBB
Pod 3 Motor Cable-1
3-Phase R/L1
S/L2
U/T1
V/T2
AC Input-1 T/L3 W/T3
3-Phase
AC Output-1
Table 31 - Frames 13…15 Bus Supply Power Wiring Requirements

AC Input In-Line or Two entry wiring bays (WB) must be used for independent three-phase AC input power connections (AC Input-1 and AC Input-2).
Back-to-Back
AC Input-1 and AC Input-2 must have the same power source and phase sequence.
The cable length and impedance from the AC power source to AC Input-1 and AC Input-2 must be the same.
DC Bus In-Line Must be continuous.
Back-to-Back A single balance connection must be provided at the motor end of the shared DC bus. This balance connection must be removed from the bus supply DC bus
output when a DC balance connection is used at the motor end of a common bus inverter running a single motor.
DC Output Back-to-Back A DC voltage balance bay (DCBVBB) must be used.
In-Line or The DC bus bar or cable length and impedance from the DC bus output (DC Output-1 and DC Output-2) to the common bus inverter DC input (where applicable)
Back-to-Back must be the same.
All connected common bus inverters must have a common DC bus.
The load on DC Output-1 or DC Output-2 must not exceed 55% of the total bus supply rating.
The total load must not exceed 100% of the bus supply rating.
Figure 121 - Frame 13…15 Bus Supply, In-Line Configuration Power Wiring Diagram
Frame 13 Bus Supply Shown
R/L1 R/L1
S/L2 S/L2
T/L3 T/L3
+DC +DC
-DC -DC
DC Output-2 DC Output-1
(To Common Bus Inverter (To Common Bus Inverter)
F5 L5 L4 F3 L3 IB WB WB IB L0 F0 L1 F2 L2
Pod
R/L1 R/L1
S/L2 S/L2
T/L3 T/L3
3-Phase 3-Phase
AC Input-2 AC Input-1

Chapter 5
Figure 122 - Frame 13…15 Bus Supply, Back-to-Back Configuration Power Wiring Diagram
Frame 13 Bus Supply Shown R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+DC
-DC
DC Output-2
(To Common Bus Inverter)
WB IB L3 F3 L4 L5 F5 DCVBB
3-Phase R/L1
S/L2 DC Voltage Balance
AC Output-2 T/L3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+DC
-DC
DC Output-1
(To Common Bus Inverter)
WB IB L0 F0 L1 F2 L2 DCVBB
Pod
R/L1
3-Phase S/L2
AC Output-1 T/L3
Table 32 - Frames 13…15 Common Bus Inverter Power Wiring Requirements

DC Input Back-to-Back Two control bays (CB) must be used for DC input power connections (DC Input-1 and DC Input-2).
The DC bus bar or cable length and impedance from the DC output power source to the common bus inverter DC Input-1 and DC Input-2 must be the same.
DC Bus A single balance connection must be provided at the motor end of the shared DC bus. This balance connection must be removed from the common bus inverter
DC bus when a DC balance connection is used at the motor end of a bus supply.
AC Output A DC voltage balance bay (DCVBB) must be used.
Motor cables (Motor Cable-1 and Motor Cable-2) from the AC output connections (AC Output-1 and AC Output-2), respectively, to the motor must be the same
length and impedance.
Both sets of motor cables (Motor Cable-1 and Motor Cable-2) must be connected to a single motor only.
Figure 123 - Frame 13…15 Common Bus Inverter, Back-to-Back Configuration Power Wiring
Diagram
Frame 13 Common Bus Inverter Shown
+DC
DC Input-2 -DC
DC Voltage Balance
CB M3 M4 M5 DCVBB
U/T1
V/T2 3-Phase
W/T3 AC Output-2
3 Motor Cable-2
+DC
DC Input-1 -DC
Motor
CB M0 M1 M2 DCVBB
Pod 3 Motor Cable-1

U/T1
V/T2
3-Phase
W/T3 AC Output-1

Chapter 5
Customer Supplied Control Customer connections to provide the control bus with 240V AC and 24V DC
power are provided in the input bay and control bay of applicable 755T
Bus Power products.
24V DC Power and Shunt Trip Terminal Block Connections—Frames

5 and 6
Use the terminal block to connect an external 24V DC power source.

Use the terminal block to connect to a shunt trip circuit.
This 24V DC power source provides auxiliary power to the control pod and
other control circuits when main power has been removed.
+24V DC Common
Common +24V DC
Frame 5 Frame 6
Terminal Frame Wire Size Strip Length Recommended Torque
Block
IP00
24V DC 5…6 6 mm2 (22…8 AWG) 12 mm (0.47 in.) 1.2 N•m (10 lb•in)
Shunt Trip
See pages 207, 208, and 212 for 24V and shunt trip terminal locations.
See page 217 for shunt trip wiring examples.
240V AC Terminal Block and Control Bus Connections—Frames

8…15
Use terminal block TB2 to connect an external 240V AC power source to

PowerFlex 755TM bus supplies that do not have the internal C1 control
transformer option.

Chapter 5
IMPORTANT Do not connect an external 240V AC control power source to 755TM bus
supplies that are equipped with the internal C1 control transformer option.
See the system nameplate for 240V AC input requirements to verify that an
external control power supply is required. See page 20 for nameplate
location.
PowerFlex 755TL and 755TR drive products come equipped with the C1
control transformer. An external control power supply is not required for these
products.
TB2
+240V AC Line L2
Control Bus Connector
Neutral N2

Block
IP21 IP54
TB2 7…11 7…9 6 mm2 (22…8 AWG) 12 mm (0.47 in.) 1.6 N•m (14.2 lb•in)
12 10 10 mm2 (18…6 AWG) 12 mm (0.47 in.) 2.3 N•m (20.4 lb•in)
— 11 16 mm2 (18…4 AWG) 16 mm (0.63 in.) 4 N•m (35 lb•in)
— 12 35 mm2 (12…1/0 AWG) 18 mm (0.70 in.) 5.8 N•m (51 lb•in)
Control bus 7…12 7…12 2 mm2 (26…14 AWG) 12 mm (0.47 in.) — (spring type)
24V DC Terminal Block and Control Bus Connections—Frames

7…15
Use terminal block TB5 to connect an external 24V DC power source. This
source provides auxiliary power to the control pod and other control circuits
when main power has been removed.
TB5
+24V DC
Control Bus Connector
Common

Block
IP20 IP54
TB5 8…12 8…12 6 mm2 (22…8 AWG) 12 mm (0.47 in.) 1.6 N•m (14.2 lb•in)
Control bus 8…12 8…12 2 mm2 (26…14 AWG) 12 mm (0.47 in.) — (spring type)

Chapter 5
Table 33 - Product 24V DC Power Requirements

Product Frame Maximum Power Requirements, Watts
755TL and 755TR drives 5 240
6 240
7 240
8 213
9 276
10 339
11 402
12 465
13 528
14 654
15 780
755TM bus supplies 6 240
7 209
8 182
9 213
10 245
11 276
12 308
13 339
14 402
15 465
755TM bus supplies with one 755TM 8 157
common bus inverter 9 188
10 220
11 251
12 283
13 314
14 377
15 440
755TM bus supplies with two 755TM 8 313
common bus inverters 9 376
10 439

Chapter 5
TB2 and TB5 Terminal Block Locations

Figure 124 - Control Bay TB2 Terminal Block Location
Figure 125 - Frame 7 Power Bay Terminal Block Location
TB4 TB5 TB3 TB7

Chapter 5
Figure 126 - Frame 8 Input Bay TB2 and TB5 Terminal Block Locations
Figure 127 - Frame 9 Input Bay TB2 and TB5 Terminal Block Locations

Chapter 5
Figure 128 - Frame 10, 11, 13, and 14 Input Bay TB2 and TB5 Terminal Block Locations
Figure 129 - Frame 12 and 15, 400/480V, Input Bay TB2 and TB5 Terminal Block Locations
IP21, UL Type 1
IP54, UL Type 12

Chapter 5
Figure 130 - Frame 12 and 15, 600/690V, Input Bay TB2 and TB5 Terminal Block Locations
IP21, UL Type 1
IP54, UL Type 12

Chapter 5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers The tables on the following pages provide recommended AC line input fuse
and circuit breaker information. Sizes that are listed are the recommended sizes
that are based on 40 °C (104 °F) and the U.S. NEC. Other country, state, or
local codes can require different ratings. In addition, floor mount drives and
bus supplies (frames 7…15) include AC line and DC bus fuses (with blown
fuse indicators) to provide short circuit protection. Panel mount drives and bus
supplies (frames 5…6) require the use of external high-speed semiconductor
fuses to provide short circuit protection.
Fusing
The recommended fuse types are listed here. If available current ratings do not
match the ratings that are listed in the tables provided, choose the next higher
fuse rating.
• IEC – Use type gG or equivalent conforming to EN60269-1, Parts 1
and 2.
• UL – 400, 480, and 600V-class frame 5 and 6 products use high-speed
semiconductor FWP series fuses.
• UL – 690V-class frame 5 and 6 products use high-speed semiconductor
FWJ series fuses.
• UL – Frames 7…15 products use Class T, RK1, J, or L type conforming
to UL 248.
Circuit Breakers
The ‘non-fuse’ listings in the following tables include inverse time circuit
breakers and instantaneous trip circuit breakers (motor circuit protectors).
Both types of circuit breakers are acceptable for IEC installations.
IMPORTANT Rockwell Automation recommends the use of external fuses for branch
circuit protection. External fusing helps protect the drive in the event of an
internal short caused by an industrial accident while the drive is energized.
Circuit breakers can be used in series with fuses as means for disconnection.

Chapter 5
400 Volt AC and 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices—Frames 5…6

400 Volt AC Input 540 Volt DC Input
AC Input Protection Devices DC Ouput Protection Devices (2)
Output Continuous Minimum
Cont. Overload Amps AC Input High Speed Semiconductor Continuous DC DC Output
Applied Output Duty Catalog FWP Series Fuse Output Protection Devices
Rating (1) Number Fuse
Amps
Frame
1 min 3s Amps Amps Amps Bussmann Amps Bussmann Part No. (3)
Part No.
7.5 kW 5 22 Light 20x…C015 24 — 21 FWP-40B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
15.4 Normal 17 23 14 FWP-40B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
11.5 Heavy 17 21 11 FWP-40B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
11 kW 5 30 Light 20x…C022 33 — 28 FWP-50B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
22 Normal 24 33 21 FWP-50B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
15.4 Heavy 23 28 14 FWP-50B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
22 Heavy 33 40 21 FWP-70B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
18.5 kW 5 43 Light 20x…C037 47 — 40 FWP-80B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
30 kW 5 72 Light 20x…C060 79 — 67 FWP-125B 200 FWP-200A 175 FWP-175A
60 Normal 66 90 56 FWP-125B 200 FWP-200A 175 FWP-175A
43 Heavy 65 77 40 FWP-125B 200 FWP-200A 175 FWP-175A
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘C043’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 30 kW motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 22 kW motor or in
Light Duty mode on a 37 kW motor. The drive can be programmed for each mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty
mode provides higher continuous current but smaller overload current with respect to Heavy Duty mode. See parameter 0:36 [Duty Rating Act].
(2) DC output fusing is required for bus supplies and for drive configurations that use the DC output terminals.
(3) The Cooper Bussmann part number listed, or an equivalent device, is recommended for use on the DC output.

Chapter 5

Amps
Frame
Part No.
10 Hp 5 22 Light 20x…D014 24 — 20 FWP-40B 100 FWP-100B 100 FWP-100B
40 Hp 5 65 Light 20x…D052 72 — 58 FWP-125B 200 FWP-200A 175 FWP-175A
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘D040’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 30 Hp motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 25 Hp motor or in
Light Duty mode on a 40 Hp motor. The drive can be programmed for each mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty

Chapter 5

Amps
Frame
Part No.
10 Hp 5 17 Light 20x…E011 19 — 15 FWP-30B 150 FWP-150A 125 FWJ-125A
11 Normal 12 17 10 FWP-30B 150 FWP-150A 125 FWJ-125A
9 Heavy 14 16 8 FWP-30B 150 FWP-150A 125 FWJ-125A
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘E041’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 40 Hp motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 30 Hp motor or in
Light Duty mode on a 50 Hp motor. The drive can be programmed for each mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty

Chapter 5

Cont. Overload Amps AC Input Dual Element Time Delay Continuous DC DC Output
Applied Output Duty Catalog FWJ Series Fuse Output Protection Devices
Amps
Frame
1 min 3s Amps Amps 1/Phase Max (3) Amps Bussmann Part No. (5)
Min (2)
11 kW 5 20 Light 20x…F015 22 — 18 FWJ-35A 125 FWJ-125A 125 FWJ-125A
15 Normal 17 23 13 FWJ-35A 125 FWJ-125A 125 FWJ-125A
12 Heavy 18 22 11 FWJ-35A 125 FWJ-125A 125 FWJ-125A
18.5 kW 5 30 Light 20x…F023 33 — 27 FWJ-50A 125 FWJ-125A 125 FWJ-125A
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘F046’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 37 kW motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 30 kW motor or in
Light Duty mode on a 45 kW motor. The drive can be programmed for each mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty
(2) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
(3) Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.

400 Volt AC and 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices - Frames 7…12
Input
AC Input Integral AC Input Protection Devices Quantities DC Input Integral
Output Continuous
Cont. Overload Amps AC Input Semiconductor Fuse Size Semiconductor
Applied Output Duty Catalog (170M Type) (2) Dual Element Time Delay Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (5) Continuous Fuse Kit (7)
Rating (1) Number Fuse Motor Circuit DC Input
Amps
1 min 3s Amps 2xLCL Qty. 1xLCL Qty. 1/Phase Max (4) 1/Phase Max (4) Min Max Protector (6) Amps Amps Qty.
Amps Amps Min (3) Min (3)
Frame
160 kW 7 367 Light 20x…C302 404 — 343 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 394 1400 2
302 Normal 332 453 282 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 324 1400 2
260 Heavy 390 468 243 — — 900 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 279 1400 2
200 kW 7 460 Light 20x…C367 506 — 430 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 494 1400 2
367 Normal 404 551 343 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 394 1400 2
302 Heavy 453 544 282 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 324 1400 2
250 kW 7 540 Light 20x…C460 594 — 505 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 579 1400 2
460 Normal 506 690 430 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 494 1400 2
367 Heavy 551 661 343 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 394 1400 2
315 kW 7 585 Light 20x…C540 644 — 547 — — 900 1 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 628 1400 2
540 Normal 594 810 505 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 579 1400 2
460 Heavy 690 828 430 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 494 1400 2
315 kW 7 617 Light 20x…C585 679 — 577 — — 900 1 800 1000 800 1900 800 1600 800 662 1400 2
600 Normal 660 900 561 — — 900 1 750 900 750 1800 750 1400 750 644 1400 2
500 Heavy 750 900 467 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1400 650 1200 650 537 1400 2
160 kW 8 367 Light 20x…C302 404 — 343 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 423 1400 2
302 Normal 332 453 282 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 348 1400 2
260 Heavy 390 468 243 — — 900 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 300 1400 2
200 kW 8 460 Light 20x…C367 506 — 430 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 530 1400 2

367 Normal 404 551 343 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 423 1400 2
302 Heavy 453 544 282 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 348 1400 2
250 kW 8 540 Light 20x…C460 594 — 505 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 622 1400 2
460 Normal 506 690 430 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 530 1400 2
367 Heavy 551 661 343 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 423 1400 2
315 kW 8 585 Light 20x…C540 644 — 547 — — 900 1 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 674 1400 2
540 Normal 594 810 505 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 622 1400 2
460 Heavy 690 828 430 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 530 1400 2
315 kW 8 650 Light 20x…C585 715 — 582 — — 1250 1 900 1100 900 1900 900 1600 900 749 1400 2
585 Normal 644 878 547 — — 1250 1 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 674 1400 2
472 Heavy 708 850 430 — — 1250 1 600 800 600 1400 600 1200 600 544 1400 2
See page 235 for notes.
Chapter 5
233
400 Volt AC and 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices - Frames 7…12 (Continued)
234
Chapter 5
AC Input Protection Devices Input

AC Input Integral Quantities DC Input Integral
Output Continuous Semiconductor Fuse Size Semiconductor
Applied Cont. Catalog Overload Amps AC Input Dual Element Time Delay Continuous
Output Duty (170M Type) (2) Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (5) Fuse Kit (7)
Rating (1) Amps Number Fuse Motor Circuit DC Input
Frame
355 kW 8 750 Light 20x…C650 825 — 701 — — 1250 1 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 864 1400 2
650 Normal 715 975 608 — — 1250 1 900 1100 900 1900 900 1600 900 749 1400 2
540 Heavy 810 972 505 — — 1250 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 622 1400 2
400 kW 8 796 Light 20x…C750 876 — 720 — — 1250 1 1000 1400 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 917 1400 2
750 Normal 825 1125 701 — — 1250 1 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 864 1400 2
585 Heavy 878 1053 547 — — 1250 1 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 674 1400 2
400 kW 8 832 Light 20x…C770 915 — 778 — — 1250 1 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1000 959 1400 2
770 Normal 847 1155 720 — — 1250 1 1000 1350 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 887 1400 2
650 Heavy 975 1170 600 — — 1250 1 900 1100 900 1900 900 1600 900 749 1400 2
500 kW 9 1040 Light 20x…C920 1144 — 972 1800 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1198 1400 4
920 Normal 1012 1380 860 1800 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 2500 1200 2400 1200 1060 1400 4
770 Heavy 1155 1386 720 1800 1 — — 1000 1350 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 887 1400 4
560 kW 9 1090 Light 20x…C1K0 1199 — 1019 1800 1 — — 1400 1900 1400 3000 1400 3000 1400 1256 1400 4
1040 Normal 1144 1560 972 1800 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1198 1400 4
920 Heavy 1380 1656 860 1800 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 2500 1200 2400 1200 1060 1400 4
630 kW 9 1182 Light 20x…C1K1 1300 — 1105 2000 1 — — 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1362 1400 4
1112 Normal 1223 1667 1039 2000 1 — — 1400 1900 1400 3500 1400 3000 1400 1281 1400 4
1040 Heavy 1560 1872 972 2000 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1198 1400 4
710 kW 9 1465 Light 20x…C1K2 1612 — 1370 2000 1 — — 1900 2500 1900 4000 1900 3500 1800 1688 1400 4

1175 Normal 1293 1763 1099 2000 1 — — 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1354 1400 4
1090 Heavy 1635 1962 1019 2000 1 — — 1400 1900 1400 3000 1400 3000 1400 1256 1400 4
800 kW 9 1581 Light 20x…C1K4 1739 — 1478 2000 1 — — 2000 3000 2000 4500 2000 4000 1900 1821 1400 4
1463 Normal 1612 2198 1368 2000 1 — — 1900 2500 1900 4000 1900 3500 1900 1688 1400 4
1175 Heavy 1763 2115 1099 2000 1 — — 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1354 1400 4
850 kW 10 1715 Light 20x…C1K6 1887 — 1603 2000 1 1250 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 1976 1400 6
1590 Normal 1749 2385 1478 2000 1 1250 1 2000 3000 2000 4500 2000 4000 2000 1832 1400 6
1465 Heavy 2198 2637 1370 2000 1 1250 1 1900 2500 1900 4000 1900 3500 1900 1688 1400 6
1000 kW 10 2150 Light 20x…C1K7 2365 — 2010 2000 1 1250 1 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2477 1400 6
1715 Normal 1887 2573 1603 2000 1 1250 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 1976 1400 6
1480 Heavy 2220 2664 1384 2000 1 1250 1 1900 2500 1900 4500 1900 3800 1900 1705 1400 6

Applied Cont. Catalog Overload Amps AC Input Dual Element Time Delay Continuous
Rating (1) Amps Number Fuse Motor Circuit DC Input
Frame
1250 kW 10 2330 Light 20x…C2K1 2563 — 2178 2000 1 1250 1 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 2684 1400 6
2156 Normal 2372 3234 2016 2000 1 1250 1 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2484 1400 6
1715 Heavy 2573 3087 1603 2000 1 1250 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 1976 1400 6
1650 kW 11 3078 Light 20x…C2K8 3386 — 2878 2000 2 — — 4000 5000 4000 6000 4000 6000 3800 3546 1400 8
2849 Normal 3134 4274 2664 2000 2 — — 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 3282 1400 8
2330 Heavy 3495 4194 2179 2000 2 — — 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 2684 1400 8
2000 kW 12 3846 Light 20x…C3K5 4231 — 3578 2000 2 1250 1 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 4431 1400 10
3542 Normal 3896 5313 3312 2000 2 1250 1 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 4081 1400 10
3032 Heavy 4548 5458 2835 2000 2 1250 1 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 3493 1400 10
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘C460’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 250 kW motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 200 kW motor or in Light Duty mode on a 315 kW motor. The drive can be programmed for
each mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty mode provides higher continuous current but smaller overload current with respect to Heavy Duty mode. See parameter 306 [Duty Rating].
See Intermittent Overload on page 250 for an explanation of Duty Ratings.
(2) These AC line fuses (with blown fuse indicators) are included in the drive to provide drive short circuit protection. AC input protection devices for branch circuit protection based on US NEC are listed in the table. Each LCL filter has one fuse per phase.
(5) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.
(6) Recommended Motor circuit protector - Instantaneous trip circuit breaker. The trip setting should be set to the input current of the drive and should be sized for the continuous current of the system.
(7) These DC line fuses (with blown fuse indicators) are included in the drive to provide drive short circuit protection.

Chapter 5
235
236
Chapter 5

Input
Catalog Output Continuous
Cont. Number Overload Amps AC Input Semiconductor Fuse Size Semiconductor
Applied Output Duty (170M Type) (2) Dual Element Time Delay Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (5) Continuous Fuse Kit (7)
Rating (1) Fuse Motor Circuit DC Input
Amps
(x = G or J) 1 min 3s Amps 2xLCL Qty. 1xLCL Qty. 1/Phase Max (4) 1/Phase Max (4) Min Max Protector (6) Amps Amps Qty.
Frame
250 Hp 7 361 Light 20x…D302 397 — 323 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1000 500 900 500 371 1400 2
302 Normal 332 453 271 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 311 1400 2
248 Heavy 372 446 222 — — 900 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 255 1400 2
300 Hp 7 430 Light 20x…D361 473 — 385 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1200 600 1000 600 442 1400 2
361 Normal 397 542 323 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1000 500 900 500 371 1400 2
302 Heavy 453 544 271 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 311 1400 2
350 Hp 7 485 Light 20x…D430 534 — 435 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1500 650 1200 650 499 1400 2
430 Normal 473 645 385 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1200 600 1000 600 442 1400 2
361 Heavy 542 650 323 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1000 500 900 500 371 1400 2
400 Hp 7 545 Light 20x…D505 600 — 488 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 560 1400 2
505 Normal 556 758 452 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1500 650 1200 650 519 1400 2
430 Heavy 645 774 385 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1200 600 1000 600 442 1400 2
500 Hp 7 617 Light 20x…D617 679 — 553 — — 900 1 800 1000 800 1800 800 1600 800 635 1400 2
600 Normal 660 900 538 — — 900 1 750 900 750 1600 750 1400 750 617 1400 2
500 Heavy 750 900 448 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1400 650 120 650 514 1400 2
250 Hp 8 361 Light 20x…D302 397 — 323 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1000 500 900 500 399 1400 2
302 Normal 332 453 271 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 333 1400 2
248 Heavy 372 446 222 — — 900 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 274 1400 2
300 Hp 8 430 Light 20x…D361 473 — 385 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1200 600 1000 600 475 1400 2

361 Normal 397 542 323 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1000 500 900 500 399 1400 2
302 Heavy 453 544 271 — — 900 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 333 1400 2
350 Hp 8 485 Light 20x…D430 534 — 435 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1500 650 1200 650 535 1400 2
430 Normal 473 645 385 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1200 600 1000 600 475 1400 2
361 Heavy 542 650 323 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1000 500 900 500 399 1400 2
400 Hp 8 545 Light 20x…D505 600 — 488 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 602 1400 2
505 Normal 556 758 452 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1500 650 1200 650 558 1400 2
430 Heavy 645 774 385 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1200 600 1000 600 475 1400 2
450 Hp 8 617 Light 20x…D545 679 — 529 — — 1250 1 800 1000 800 1800 800 1500 800 681 1400 2
545 Normal 600 818 488 — — 1250 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 602 1400 2
454 Heavy 681 817 385 — — 1250 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 501 1400 2

Catalog Output Continuous Semiconductor Fuse Size Semiconductor
Applied Cont. Number Overload Amps AC Input Dual Element Time Delay Continuous
Rating (1) Amps Fuse Motor Circuit DC Input
Frame
500 Hp 8 710 Light 20x…D617 781 — 636 — — 1250 1 900 1200 900 2000 900 1800 900 784 1400 2
617 Normal 679 926 553 — — 1250 1 800 1000 800 1800 800 1500 800 681 1400 2
485 Heavy 728 873 435 — — 1250 1 700 800 700 1400 700 1200 700 535 1400 2
600 Hp 8 765 Light 20x…D710 842 — 663 — — 1250 1 1000 1350 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 845 1400 2
710 Normal 781 1065 636 — — 1250 1 900 1200 900 2000 900 1800 900 784 1400 2
545 Heavy 818 981 488 — — 1250 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 602 1400 2
650 Hp 8 800 Light 20x…D740 880 — 717 — — 1250 1 1000 1400 1000 2400 1000 2000 1000 883 1400 2
740 Normal 814 1110 663 — — 1250 1 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 817 1400 2
617 Heavy 926 1111 553 — — 1250 1 800 1000 800 1800 800 1500 800 681 1400 2
700 Hp 9 960 Light 20x…D800 1056 — 860 1800 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 3000 1200 2400 1200 1060 1400 4
800 Normal 880 1200 717 1800 1 — — 1000 1400 1000 2400 1000 2000 1000 883 1400 4
740 Heavy 1110 1332 663 1800 1 — — 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 817 1400 4
800 Hp 9 1045 Light 20x…D960 1150 — 936 1800 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1154 1400 4
960 Normal 1056 1440 860 1800 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 3000 1200 2400 1200 1060 1400 4
800 Heavy 1200 1440 717 1800 1 — — 1000 1400 1000 2400 1000 2000 1000 883 1400 4
900 Hp 9 1135 Light 20x…D1K0 1249 — 1004 2000 1 — — 1500 1900 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1253 1400 4
1045 Normal 1150 1568 936 2000 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1154 1400 4
960 Heavy 1440 1728 860 2000 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 3000 1200 2400 1200 1060 1400 4
1000 Hp 9 1365 Light 20x…D1K1 1502 — 1223 2000 1 — — 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1507 1400 4

1135 Normal 1249 1703 1017 2000 1 — — 1500 1900 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1253 1400 4
1045 Heavy 1568 1881 936 2000 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1154 1400 4
1100 Hp 9 1520 Light 20x…D1K3 1672 — 1362 2000 1 — — 1900 2500 1900 4500 1900 3800 1900 1678 1400 4
1365 Normal 1502 2048 1223 2000 1 — — 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1507 1400 4
1135 Heavy 1703 2043 1017 2000 1 — — 1500 1900 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1253 1400 4
1250 Hp 10 1655 Light 20x…D1K4 1821 — 1483 2000 1 1250 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4000 2400 1827 1400 6
1420 Normal 1562 2130 1272 2000 1 1250 1 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1568 1400 6
1365 Heavy 2048 2457 1223 2000 1 1250 1 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1507 1400 6
1500 Hp 10 2070 Light 20x…D1K6 2277 — 1855 2000 1 1250 1 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2285 1400 6
1655 Normal 1821 2483 1483 2000 1 1250 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4000 2400 1827 1400 6
1420 Heavy 2130 2556 1272 2000 1 1250 1 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1568 1400 6
Chapter 5
237
238
Chapter 5

Frame
1800 Hp 10 2240 Light 20x…D2K0 2464 — 2007 2000 1 1250 1 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2473 1400 6
2072 Normal 2279 3108 1857 2000 1 1250 1 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2288 1400 6
1655 Heavy 2483 2979 1483 2000 1 1250 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4000 2400 1827 1400 6
2400 Hp 11 2960 Light 20x…D2K6 3256 — 2652 2000 2 — — 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 3268 1400 8
2738 Normal 3012 4107 2453 2000 2 — — 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 3023 1400 8
2240 Heavy 3360 4032 2007 2000 2 — — 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2473 1400 8
3000 Hp 12 3696 Light 20x…D3K4 4066 — 33297 2000 2 1250 1 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 4081 1400 10
3404 Normal 3744 5106 3050 2000 2 1250 1 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 3758 1400 10
2980 Heavy 4470 5364 2670 2000 2 1250 1 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 3290 1400 10
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘D430’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 350 Hp motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 300 Hp motor or in Light Duty mode on a 400 Hp motor. The drive can be programmed for

Input
Amps
Frame
200 Hp 7 242 Light 20x…E192 266 — 217 — — 700 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 249 1100 2
192 Normal 211 288 172 — — 700 1 250 350 250 600 250 500 250 197 1100 2
144 Heavy 216 259.2 129 — — 700 1 175 400 200 400 200 350 200 148 1100 2
250 Hp 7 295 Light 20x…E242 325 — 264 — — 700 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 303 1100 2
242 Normal 266 363 217 — — 700 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 249 1100 2
192 Heavy 288 345.6 172 — — 700 1 250 350 250 600 250 500 250 197 1100 2
300 Hp 7 355 Light 20x…E295 391 — 318 — — 700 1 450 600 450 1000 450 900 450 365 1100 2
295 Normal 325 442.5 264 — — 700 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 303 1100 2
242 Heavy 363 435.6 217 — — 700 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 249 1100 2
350 Hp 7 395 Light 20x…E355 435 — 354 — — 700 1 500 700 500 1100 500 1000 500 406 1100 2
355 Normal 391 532.5 318 — — 700 1 450 600 450 1000 450 900 450 365 1100 2
295 Heavy 443 531 264 — — 700 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 303 1100 2
400 Hp 7 435 Light 20x…E395 479 — 390 — — 700 1 600 750 600 1350 600 1100 600 447 1100 2
395 Normal 435 592.5 354 — — 700 1 500 700 500 1100 500 1000 500 406 1100 2
355 Heavy 533 639 318 — — 700 1 450 600 450 1000 450 900 450 365 1100 2
250 Hp 8 295 Light 20x…E242 325 — 264 — — 700 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 326 1100 2
242 Normal 266 363 217 — — 700 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 267 1100 2
192 Heavy 288 346 172 — — 700 1 250 350 250 600 250 500 250 212 1100 2
300 Hp 8 355 Light 20x…E295 391 — 318 — — 700 1 450 600 450 1000 450 900 450 392 1100 2

295 Normal 325 443 264 — — 700 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 326 1100 2
242 Heavy 363 436 217 — — 700 1 350 400 350 750 350 600 350 267 1100 2
350 Hp 8 395 Light 20x…E355 435 — 354 — — 700 1 500 700 500 1100 500 1000 500 436 1100 2
355 Normal 391 533 318 — — 700 1 450 600 450 1000 450 900 450 392 1100 2
295 Heavy 443 531 264 — — 700 1 400 500 400 900 400 750 400 326 1100 2
400 Hp 8 435 Light 20x…E395 479 — 390 — — 700 1 600 750 600 1350 600 1100 600 480 1100 2
395 Normal 435 593 354 — — 700 1 500 700 500 1100 500 1000 500 436 1100 2
355 Heavy 533 639 318 — — 700 1 450 600 450 1000 450 900 450 392 1100 2
450 Hp 8 510 Light 20x…E435 561 — 457 — — 900 1 650 900 650 1500 650 1200 650 563 1100 2
435 Normal 479 653 390 — — 900 1 600 750 600 1350 600 1100 600 480 1100 2
395 Heavy 593 711 354 — — 900 1 500 700 500 1100 500 1000 500 436 1100 2
Chapter 5
239
240
Chapter 5

Frame
550 Hp 8 580 Light 20x…E545 638 — 520 — — 900 1 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 640 1100 2
545 Normal 600 818 488 — — 900 1 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 602 1100 2
450 Heavy 675 810 403 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 497 1100 2
600 Hp 9 690 Light 20x…E595 759 — 618 1250 1 — — 900 1200 900 2000 900 1800 900 762 1100 4
580 Normal 638 870 520 1250 1 — — 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 640 1100 4
545 Heavy 818 981 488 1250 1 — — 700 900 700 1600 700 1350 700 602 1100 4
700 Hp 9 760 Light 20x…E690 836 — 681 1250 1 — — 1000 1350 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 839 1100 4
690 Normal 759 1035 618 1250 1 — — 900 1200 900 2000 900 1800 900 762 1100 4
595 Heavy 893 1071 520 1250 1 — — 750 1000 750 1800 750 1400 750 657 1100 4
800 Hp 9 825 Light 20x…E760 908 — 739 1250 1 — — 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1100 911 1100 4
760 Normal 836 1140 681 1250 1 — — 1000 1350 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 839 1100 4
690 Heavy 1035 1242 618 1250 1 — — 900 1200 900 2000 900 1800 900 762 1100 4
900 Hp 9 980 Light 20x…E825 1078 — 878 1600 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2400 1350 1082 1100 4
825 Normal 908 1238 739 1600 1 — — 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1100 911 1100 4
760 Heavy 1140 1368 681 1600 1 — — 1000 1350 1000 2400 1000 1900 1000 839 1100 4
1000 Hp 9 1102 Light 20x…E980 1212 — 987 1600 1 — — 1400 1900 1400 3500 1400 2500 1400 1217 1100 4
980 Normal 1078 1470 878 1600 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2400 1350 1082 1100 4
825 Heavy 1238 1485 739 1600 1 — — 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1100 911 1100 4
1100 Hp 10 1220 Light 20x…E1K1 1342 — 1093 1600 1 900 1 1600 2000 1600 3500 1600 3000 1600 1347 1100 6

1045 Normal 1150 1568 936 1600 1 900 1 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1154 1100 6
980 Heavy 1470 1764 878 1600 1 900 1 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2400 1350 1082 1100 6
1250 Hp 10 1430 Light 20x…E1K2 1573 — 1281 1600 1 900 1 1800 2500 1800 4500 1800 3500 1800 1579 1100 6
1220 Normal 1342 1830 1093 1600 1 900 1 1600 2000 1600 3500 1600 3000 1600 1347 1100 6
1045 Heavy 1568 1881 936 1600 1 900 1 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1154 1100 6
1500 Hp 10 1624 Light 20x…E1K5 1786 — 1455 1600 1 900 1 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4000 2400 1793 1100 6
1430 Normal 1573 2145 1281 1600 1 900 1 1800 2500 1800 4500 1800 3500 1800 1579 1100 6
1220 Heavy 1830 2196 1093 1600 1 900 1 1600 2000 1600 3500 1600 3000 1600 1347 1100 6
2000 Hp 11 2146 Light 20x…E2K0 2361 — 1923 1600 2 — — 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2369 1100 8
1946 Normal 2141 2919 1744 1600 2 — — 2500 3500 2500 6000 2500 5000 2500 2148 1100 8
1700 Heavy 2550 3060 1523 1600 2 — — 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 1877 1100 8

Frame
2500 Hp 12 2668 Light 20x…E2K4 2935 — 2391 1600 2 900 1 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 2946 1100 10
2420 Normal 2662 3630 2168 1600 2 900 1 3500 4000 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 2672 1100 10
2070 Heavy 3105 3726 1855 1600 2 900 1 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2285 1100 10
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘E355’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 350 Hp motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 300 Hp motor or in Light Duty mode on a 400 Hp motor. The drive can be programmed for

Chapter 5
241
242
Chapter 5

Input
Amps
Frame
160 kW 7 215 Light 20x…F171 237 — 192 — — 700 1 300 400 300 650 300 500 300 221 1100 2
171 Normal 188 257 153 — — 700 1 250 300 250 500 250 450 250 176 1100 2
142 Heavy 213 256 127 — — 700 1 175 250 200 400 200 350 200 146 1100 2
200 kW 7 265 Light 20x…F215 292 — 237 — — 700 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 272 1100 2
215 Normal 237 323 192 — — 700 1 300 400 300 650 300 500 300 221 1100 2
171 Heavy 257 308 153 — — 700 1 250 300 250 500 250 450 250 176 1100 2
250 kW 7 330 Light 20x…F265 363 — 295 — — 700 1 450 600 450 900 450 800 450 339 1100 2
265 Normal 292 398 237 — — 700 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 272 1100 2
215 Heavy 323 387 192 — — 700 1 300 400 300 650 300 500 300 221 1100 2
315 kW 7 370 Light 20x…F330 407 — 331 — — 700 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 380 1100 2
330 Normal 363 495 295 — — 700 1 450 600 450 900 450 800 450 339 1100 2
265 Heavy 398 477 237 — — 700 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 272 1100 2
355 kW 7 415 Light 20x…F370 457 — 371 — — 700 1 600 700 600 1200 600 1000 600 426 1100 2
370 Normal 407 555 331 — — 700 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 380 1100 2
330 Heavy 495 594 295 — — 700 1 450 600 450 900 450 800 450 339 1100 2
200 kW 8 265 Light 20x…F215 292 — 237 — — 700 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 292 1100 2
215 Normal 237 323 192 — — 700 1 300 400 300 650 300 500 300 237 1100 2
171 Heavy 257 308 153 — — 700 1 250 300 250 500 250 450 250 188 1100 2
250 kW 8 330 Light 20x…F265 363 — 295 — — 700 1 450 600 450 900 450 800 450 364 1100 2

265 Normal 292 398 237 — — 700 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 292 1100 2
215 Heavy 323 387 192 — — 700 1 300 400 300 650 300 500 300 237 1100 2
315 kW 8 370 Light 20x…F330 407 — 331 — — 700 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 408 1100 2
330 Normal 363 495 295 — — 700 1 450 600 450 900 450 800 450 364 1100 2
265 Heavy 398 477 237 — — 700 1 350 450 350 800 350 650 350 292 1100 2
355 kW 8 415 Light 20x…F370 457 — 371 — — 700 1 600 700 600 1200 600 1000 600 457 1100 2
370 Normal 407 555 331 — — 700 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 408 1100 2
330 Heavy 495 594 295 — — 700 1 450 600 450 900 450 800 450 364 1100 2
400 kW 8 460 Light 20x…F415 506 — 411 — — 900 1 600 800 600 1350 600 1100 600 507 1100 2
415 Normal 457 623 371 — — 900 1 600 700 600 1200 600 1000 600 457 1100 2
370 Heavy 555 666 331 — — 900 1 500 650 500 1100 500 900 500 408 1100 2

Frame
500 kW 8 565 Light 20x…F505 622 — 505 — — 900 1 750 1000 750 1600 750 1400 750 623 1100 2
505 Normal 556 758 452 — — 900 1 650 800 650 1500 650 1200 650 556 1100 2
415 Heavy 623 747 371 — — 900 1 600 700 600 1200 600 1000 600 457 1100 2
560 kW 9 650 Light 20x…F565 715 — 581 1250 1 — — 900 1100 900 1900 900 1600 900 716 1100 4
565 Normal 622 848 505 1250 1 — — 750 1000 750 1600 750 1400 750 623 1100 4
505 Heavy 758 909 452 1250 1 — — 650 800 650 1500 650 1200 650 556 1100 4
630 kW 9 735 Light 20x…F650 809 — 657 1250 1 — — 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 810 1100 4
650 Normal 715 975 581 1250 1 — — 900 1100 900 1900 900 1600 900 716 1100 4
565 Heavy 848 1017 505 1250 1 — — 750 1000 750 1600 750 1400 750 623 1100 4
710 kW 9 820 Light 20x…F735 902 — 733 1250 1 — — 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1100 904 1100 4
735 Normal 809 1103 657 1250 1 — — 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 810 1100 4
650 Heavy 975 1170 581 1250 1 — — 900 1100 900 1900 900 1600 900 716 1100 4
800 kW 9 920 Light 20x…F820 1012 — 823 1600 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 2500 1200 2400 1200 1014 1100 4
820 Normal 902 1230 733 1600 1 — — 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1100 904 1100 4
735 Heavy 1103 1323 657 1600 1 — — 1000 1200 1000 2000 1000 1800 1000 810 1100 4
900 kW 9 1074 Light 20x…F920 1181 — 960 1600 1 — — 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1183 1100 4
920 Normal 1012 1380 823 1600 1 — — 1200 1600 1200 2500 1200 2400 1200 1014 1100 4
820 Heavy 1230 1476 733 1600 1 — — 1100 1400 1100 2400 1100 2000 1100 904 1100 4
1000 kW 10 1150 Light 20x…F1K0 1265 — 1028 1250 1 900 1 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1267 1100 6

1030 Normal 1133 1545 921 1250 1 900 1 1350 1800 1350 3000 1350 2500 1350 1135 1100 6
920 Heavy 1380 1656 823 1250 1 900 1 1200 1600 1200 2500 1200 2400 1200 1014 1100 6
1100 kW 10 1344 Light 20x…F1K1 1478 — 1202 1250 1 900 1 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1481 1100 6
1150 Normal 1265 1725 1028 1250 1 900 1 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1267 1100 6
1030 Heavy 1545 1854 921 1250 1 900 1 1350 1800 1350 3500 1350 2500 1350 1135 1100 6
1400 kW 10 1582 Light 20x…F1K4 1740 — 1365 1250 1 900 1 2000 3000 2000 4500 2000 4000 2000 1743 1100 6
1419 Normal 1561 2129 1269 1250 1 900 1 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 1564 1100 6
1162 Heavy 1743 2092 1039 1250 1 900 1 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 1280 1100 6
1800 kW 11 2091 Light 20x…F1K8 2300 — 1803 1600 2 — — 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2304 1100 8
1865 Normal 2052 2798 1668 1600 2 — — 2400 3500 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 2055 1100 8
1535 Heavy 2303 2763 1373 1600 2 — — 2000 2500 2000 4500 2000 3800 2000 1692 1100 8
Chapter 5
243
244
Chapter 5

Frame
2300 kW 12 2599 Light 20x…F2K3 2859 — 2242 1600 2 900 1 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 2864 1100 10
2318 Normal 2550 3477 2073 1600 2 900 1 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 2554 1100 10
2020 Heavy 3030 3636 1807 1600 2 900 1 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 2226 1100 10
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘F330’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 315 kW motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 250 kW motor or in Light Duty mode on a 355 kW motor. The drive can be programmed for

Chapter 5
Dual Input Drives Fuse and Circuit Breakers
Frame 13…15 products require dual AC line inputs. Dependent on the output
current rating, a single protection device can be used or dual protection devices
are required. The following Input Protection Device tables, the top table lists
single protection device ratings and the bottom table lists dual protection
device ratings.
Single Protection Device Scheme

A single branch circuit protection device can be used with PowerFlex 755T
products that are rated less than 5400 A.
Right-to-Left Left-to-Right
Entry Wire Bay Entry Wire Bay
PE PE
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
Single Branch
Circuit Device
Dual Protection Device Scheme

Use dual branch circuit protection devices in a dual-input configuration for
PowerFlex 755T products that are rated over 5400 A.
Important: Do not wire dual branch circuit protection devices in parallel.
Right-to-Left Left-to-Right
Entry Wire Bay Entry Wire Bay
PE PE
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
Dual Branch Circuit Devices
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)

246
400 Volt AC and 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices for Single Branch Circuit Device Configurations - Frames 13…15
400 Volt AC Input – Single Branch Circuit Device (See page 245) 540 Volt DC Input
Chapter 5

Applied Cont. Catalog Overload Amps AC Input Dual Element Time Delay Non-Time Delay Fuse – Continuous
Output Duty (170M Type) (2) Circuit Breaker (5) Fuse Kit (7)
Rating (1) Amps Number Fuse – 1/Phase 1/Phase Motor Circuit DC Input
1 min 3s Amps 2xLCL Qty. 1xLCL Qty. Min (3) Max (4) Min (3) Max (4) Min Max Protector (6) Amps Amps Qty.
Amps Amps
Frame
2200 kW 13 4576 Light 20x…C4K2 5034 — 4279 2000 2 1250 2 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 5275 1400 12
4235 Normal 4659 6353 3960 2000 2 1250 2 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 4879 1400 12
3575 Heavy 5363 6435 3300 2000 2 1250 2 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 4070 1400 12
2920 kW 14 6074 Light 20x…C5K6 6681 — 5679 2000 4 — — — — — — — — — 7001 1400 16
5621 Normal 6183 8432 5256 2000 4 — — — — — — — — — 6475 1400 16
4745 Heavy 7118 8541 4380 2000 4 — — 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 5402 1400 16
3640 kW 15 7571 Light 20x…C7K0 8328 — 7080 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 8727 1400 20
Single Branch Circuit Device

7007 Normal 7708 10,511 6552 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 8072 1400 20
5915 Heavy 8873 10,647 5460 2000 4 1250 2 — 6000 — 6000 — 6000 — 6734 1400 20
400 Volt AC and 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices for Dual Branch Circuit Device Configurations - Frames 13…15
400 Volt AC Input – Dual Branch Circuit Devices (See page 245) 540 Volt DC Input
Input
Cont. Overload Amps AC Input (2)
Applied Output Duty Catalog (170M Type) Dual Element Time Delay Non-Time Delay Fuse – Circuit Breaker (5) Continuous Fuse Kit (7)
Rating (1) Number Fuse – 1/Phase 1/Phase Motor Circuit DC Input
Amps
Amps Amps
Frame
2200 kW 13 4576 Light 20x…C4K2 5034 — 4279 2000 2 1250 2 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 5275 1400 12
4235 Normal 4659 6353 3960 2000 2 1250 2 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 4879 1400 12
3575 Heavy 5363 6435 3300 2000 2 1250 2 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 4070 1400 12

2920 kW 14 6074 Light 20x…C5K6 6681 — 5679 2000 4 — — 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 7001 1400 16
5621 Normal 6183 8432 5256 2000 4 — — 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 6475 1400 16
4745 Heavy 7118 8541 4380 2000 4 — — 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 5402 1400 16

3640 kW 15 7571 Light 20x…C7K0 8328 — 7080 2000 4 1250 2 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 8727 1400 20
7007 Normal 7708 10,511 6552 2000 4 1250 2 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 8072 1400 20
5915 Heavy 8873 10,647 5460 2000 4 1250 2 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 6734 1400 20
(1) ‘Applied Rating’ refers to the motor that will be connected to the drive. For example, a ‘C460’ drive can be used in Normal Duty mode on a 250 kW motor, in Heavy Duty mode on a 200 kW motor or in Light Duty mode on a 315 kW motor. The drive can be programmed for each mode. Wiring and fuses can be sized
based on the programmed mode. For any given drive catalog number, Normal Duty mode provides higher continuous current but smaller overload current with respect to Heavy Duty mode. See parameter 306 [Duty Rating].

Amps Amps
Frame
3600 Hp 13 4400 Light 20x…D4K0 4840 — 3944 2000 2 1250 2 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 3944 1400 12
4070 Normal 4477 6105 3647 2000 2 1250 2 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 3647 1400 12
3394 Heavy 5091 6109 3042 2000 2 1250 2 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 3042 1400 12
4800 Hp 14 5840 Light 20x…D5K4 6424 — 5234 2000 4 — — — — — — — — — 5234 1400 16
5402 Normal 5942 8103 4840 2000 4 — — — — — — — — — 4840 1400 16
4504 Heavy 6756 8107 4037 2000 4 — — 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 4037 1400 16
6000 Hp 15 7280 Light 20x…D6K7 8008 — 6525 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 6525 1400 20

6734 Normal 7407 10,101 6033 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 6033 1400 20
5615 Heavy 8423 10,107 5032 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 5032 1400 20
Input
Amps
Amps Amps
Frame
3600 Hp 13 4400 Light 20x…D4K0 4840 — 3944 2000 2 1250 2 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 3944 1400 12
4070 Normal 4477 6105 3647 2000 2 1250 2 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 3647 1400 12
3394 Heavy 5091 6109 3042 2000 2 1250 2 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4000 2400 3042 1400 12

4800 Hp 14 5840 Light 20x…D5K4 6424 — 5234 2000 4 — — 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 5234 1400 16
5402 Normal 5942 8103 4840 2000 4 — — 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 4840 1400 16
4504 Heavy 6756 8107 4037 2000 4 — — 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 4037 1400 16

6000 Hp 15 7280 Light 20x…D6K7 8008 — 6525 2000 4 1250 2 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6525 1400 20
6734 Normal 7407 10,101 6033 2000 4 1250 2 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6033 1400 20
5615 Heavy 8423 10,107 5032 2000 4 1250 2 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 5032 1400 20
Chapter 5
247
248
Chapter 5

Amps Amps
Frame
3100 Hp 13 3190 Light 20x…E2K9 3509 — 2860 2000 2 1250 2 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 2860 1100 12
2998 Normal 3298 4497 2684 2000 2 1250 2 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 2684 1100 12
2475 Heavy 3713 4455 2217 2000 2 1250 2 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 2217 1100 12
4100 Hp 14 4234 Light 20x…E3K9 4657 — 3796 2000 4 — — 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 3796 1100 16
3979 Normal 4377 5969 3562 2000 4 — — 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 3562 1100 16
3285 Heavy 4928 5913 2942 2000 4 — — 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 6000 4500 2942 1100 16
5100 Hp 15 5278 Light 20x…E4K9 5806 — 4732 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 4732 1100 20

4960 Normal 5456 7440 4441 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 4441 1100 20
4095 Heavy 6143 7371 3667 2000 4 1250 2 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 3667 1100 20
Input
Amps
Amps Amps
Frame
3100 Hp 13 3190 Light 20x…E2K9 3509 — 2860 2000 2 1250 2 2000 3000 2000 5000 2000 4000 2000 2860 1100 12
2998 Normal 3298 4497 2684 2000 2 1250 2 1900 2500 1900 4500 1900 3500 1900 2684 1100 12
2475 Heavy 3713 4455 2217 2000 2 1250 2 1600 2000 1600 3500 1600 3000 1600 2217 1100 12

4100 Hp 14 4234 Light 20x…E3K9 4657 — 3796 2000 4 — — 3000 3800 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 3796 1100 16
3979 Normal 4377 5969 3562 2000 4 — — 2500 3500 2500 6000 2500 5000 2500 3562 1100 16
3285 Heavy 4928 5913 2942 2000 4 — — 2400 3000 2400 5000 2400 4000 2400 2942 1100 16

5100 Hp 15 5278 Light 20x…E4K9 5806 — 4732 2000 4 1250 2 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 4732 1100 20
4960 Normal 5456 7440 4441 2000 4 1250 2 3500 4000 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 4441 1100 20
4095 Heavy 6143 7371 3667 2000 4 1250 2 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 3667 1100 20
690 Volt AC and 932 Volt DC Input Protection Devices for Single Branch Circuit Devices - Frames 13…15

Amps Amps
Frame
2750 kW 13 3108 Light 20x…F2K7 3419 — 2778 2000 2 1250 2 4000 5000 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 2778 1100 12
2778 Normal 3056 4167 2486 2000 2 1250 2 3500 5000 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 2486 1100 12
2283 Heavy 3425 4109 2041 2000 2 1250 2 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 2041 1100 12
3650 kW 14 4125 Light 20x…F3K6 4538 — 3687 2000 4 — — 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 3687 1100 16
3687 Normal 4056 5531 3300 2000 4 — — 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 3300 1100 16
3030 Heavy 4545 5454 2708 2000 4 — — 3800 5000 3800 6000 3800 6000 3800 2708 1100 16
4550 kW 15 5142 Light 20x…F4K5 5656 — 4596 2000 4 1250 2 — — — — — — — 4596 1100 20

4596 Normal 5056 6894 4113 2000 4 1250 2 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 4113 1100 20
3777 Heavy 5666 6799 3376 2000 4 1250 2 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 6000 5000 3376 1100 20
690 Volt AC and 932 Volt DC Input Protection Devices for Dual Branch Circuit Devices - Frames 13…15
Input
Amps
Amps Amps
Frame
2750 kW 13 3108 Light 20x…F2K7 3419 — 2778 2000 2 1250 2 2000 3000 2000 4500 2000 4000 2000 2778 1100 12
2778 Normal 3056 4167 2486 2000 2 1250 2 1800 2400 1800 4000 1800 3500 1800 2486 1100 12
2283 Heavy 3425 4109 2041 2000 2 1250 2 1500 2000 1500 3500 1500 3000 1500 2041 1100 12

3650 kW 14 4125 Light 20x…F3K6 4538 — 3687 2000 4 — — 3000 3500 3000 6000 3000 5000 3000 3687 1100 16
3687 Normal 4056 5531 3300 2000 4 — — 2400 3500 2400 5000 2400 4500 2400 3300 1100 16
3030 Heavy 4545 5454 2708 2000 4 — — 1900 2500 1900 4500 1900 3800 1900 2708 1100 16

4550 kW 15 5142 Light 20x…F4K5 5656 — 4596 2000 4 1250 2 3500 4500 3500 6000 3500 6000 3500 4596 1100 20
4596 Normal 5056 6894 4113 2000 4 1250 2 3000 4000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 4113 1100 20
3777 Heavy 5666 6799 3376 2000 4 1250 2 2500 3500 2500 6000 2500 5000 2500 3376 1100 20
Chapter 5
249
Chapter 5
Intermittent Overload Light Duty 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute out of 10 minutes
Normal Duty 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute out of 10 minutes
150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds out of 60 seconds
Heavy Duty 150% Overload capability for up to 1 minute out of 10 minutes
180% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds out of 60 seconds
Motor Overload Protection Electronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 motor overload protection according to NEC article 430 and motor
over-temperature protection according to NEC article 430.126 (A)(2).
UL61800-5-1 File E59272.
Short Circuit Current Rating Maximum Short Circuit Rating Frames 5…15: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes, up to 600V maximum.
Frames 6…15: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 65 kA rms symmetrical amperes at 690V maximum.
Frames 5: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
25 kA rms symmetrical amperes at 690V maximum.
Actual Short Circuit Rating Can be further limited by AIC rating of customer supplied branch circuit fuse/
circuit breaker. The lowest rated device in the circuit determines the branch
short circuit rating. If the fuses providing powers to the drive are lower than
100 kA rms, the branch short circuit protection is the short circuit rating of the
fuses. If the fuses have rating higher than 100 kA rms, the branch circuit
protection is 100 kA rms.
Applying and Removing IMPORTANT It is recommend that you wait 5 minutes before cycling power disconnect
Power switches. This recommendation applies to both Off-to-On and On-to-Off
transitions. Rapid power cycling can result in equipment damage.

Chapter 5
Input Contactor Precautions ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and
reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive
hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will
start and stop the motor. If an input device is used, operation must not
exceed one cycle every three minutes or drive damage will occur.
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop/enable control circuitry includes solid state
components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or
unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop
circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary
braking method may be required.
Output Contactor Precaution ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when using output contactors,
the following information must be read and understood. One or more output
contactors may be installed between the drive and motor(s) for the purpose
of disconnecting or isolating certain motors/loads. If a contactor is opened
while the drive is operating, power will be removed from the respective
motor, but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output
terminals. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active drive (by closing
the contactor) could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to
fault. If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe,
an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive
digital input that is programmed as “Enable.” This will cause the drive to
execute a coast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor is
opened.
Bypass Contactor Precaution ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in
component damage or reduction in product life. The most common causes
are:
• Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals.
• Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen-Bradley.
• Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor.
Contact Allen-Bradley for assistance with application or wiring.

Chapter 5
Power Jumper PowerFlex 755T products contain protective MOVs, common mode
capacitors, and discharge resistors. To guard against drive damage and/or
Configuration—Frames 5, 6, operational problems, these devices must be properly configured according to
and 7 the tables in this section. To connect or disconnect these devices, refer to the
jumper configurations shown in the figures on pages 255 and 256.
Common Mode Capacitor, MOV, AC EMI Capacitor, and Discharge

Resistor Circuits
The following power jumpers are discussed in this section.
Frame 5
• PE – Common mode capacitors on the power interface circuit board
• PE-MOV – MOV and AC EMI capacitors on the power circuit board
• DR – DC bus conditioner capacitor discharge resistor
Frame 6
• PE-A – Common mode capacitors on the common mode filter circuit
board
• PE-A (MOV & EMI) – MOV and AC EMI capacitors on the power
circuit board
Frame 7
• PE-A – MOV on the AC precharge control circuit board
• PE-A1 – MOV on the TVSS module
• PE-A2 – Common mode capacitors on the AC common mode filter
circuit board

Chapter 5
Figure 131 - Common Mode Capacitor, MOV, AC EMI Capacitor, and Discharge Resistor
Circuits— Frames 5, 6, and 7
R/L1
Frame 5 S/L2
T/L3
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
1 1 1
PE PE-MOV
R/L1
Frame 6 S/L2
T/L3
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
1 1 1
PE-A PE-A (MOV & AC EMI)
R/L1
Frame 7 S/L2
T/L3
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
1 1 1
PE-A PE-A1 PE-A2
Figure 132 - DC Bus Conditioner Discharge Resistor—Frames 5, 6, and 7
DCBC
DR
IMPORTANT The default power jumper settings are:

• All power jumpers are installed in the connected (IN) position.
• All power jumpers are installed in the disconnected (OUT) position when
the bus conditioner for marine applications (-P51) is selected.
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. The drive power source type
must be accurately determined. The power jumpers must be configured for
the power source type according to the recommendations in the PowerFlex
755T Input Product RF Emission Compliance and Installation Requirements
table on page 50.
ATTENTION: Hazard of equipment damage exists if jumpers are not properly
disconnected or are set differently between power and LCL filter modules.
Secure a disconnected jumper in the socket or on the insulated spacer that is
provided and verify that all modules are configured identically.

Chapter 5
Table 34 - PowerFlex 755TL/TR Power Jumpers—Frame 5

Grounding Scheme EMC Option PE PE-MOV DR
Common Mode Caps on MOV and AC EMI on the Discharge Resistor on the
the Power Circuit Board Power Circuit Board Power Circuit Board
Factory Default C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
Grounded C2 (2) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
Ungrounded/High- — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Connected (In)
resistance Ground (1)
AC fed ungrounded
Impedance grounded
B phase ground
Marine Ungrounded / — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
High Resistance Ground (1)
(1) Ungrounded and high-resistance ground systems do not meet the EMC Directive due to the disconnected jumper positions.
(2) Meets EN61800-3 Category C2 for conducted emissions.
Table 35 - PowerFlex 755TL/TR Power Jumpers—Frame 6

Grounding Scheme EMC Option PE-A PE-A (MOV & AC EMI) DR
Common Mode Caps on MOV and AC EMI on the Discharge Resistor on the
the AC Common Mode Power Circuit Board Power Circuit Board
Filter Circuit Board
Factory Default C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
Grounded C2 (2) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
Ungrounded/High- — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Connected (In)
AC fed ungrounded
Impedance grounded
B phase ground
Marine Ungrounded / — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
Table 36 - PowerFlex 755TL/TR Drive and 755TM Bus Supply Jumpers—Frame 7

Grounding Scheme EMC Option PE-A PE-A1 PE-A2 DR
MOV on the AC Precharge MOV in the TVSS Module Common Mode Caps on Discharge Resistor on the
Control Circuit Board the AC Common Mode DC Bus Conditioner
Filter Circuit Board
Factory Default C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
Grounded C2 (2) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In)
Ungrounded/High- — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Connected (In)
AC fed ungrounded
Impedance grounded
B phase ground
Marine Ungrounded / — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)

Chapter 5
Recommended Power Jumper Configuration—Frame 5

The PE power jumper is connected to the power interface circuit board.
The DR power jumper is connected to the DC bus conditioner capacitor
discharge resistor.
The PE-MOV power jumper is connected to the MOV and AC EMI
capacitors on the power circuit board.
Figure 133 - Frame 5 Power Jumper Configurations
PE Jumper IN PE Jumper OUT
DR Jumper IN DR Jumper OUT

PARK
PARK
PARK
PARK
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE-MOV
PE-MOV
DCBC
DCBC
PE-MOV Jumper IN PE-MOV Jumper OUT
Important: Do not disconnect the DCBC wire from the PE terminal block.

Chapter 5
Recommended Power Jumper Configuration—Frame 6
The PE-A power jumper is connected to the common mode filter circuit
board.
The PE-A (MOV & AC EMI) power jumpers are connected to the power
circuit board.
The DR power jumper is connected to the DC bus conditioner capacitor

discharge resistor.
Figure 134 - Frame 6 Power Jumper Configurations
PE-A PE-A PE-A PE-A

OUT IN OUT IN
PE-A Jumper IN PE-A Jumper OUT
PE PE PE
PE PE PE
DR DR DR
PE-A PE-A PE-A
DR Jumper IN DR Jumper IN DR Jumper OUT

PE-A (MOV & AC EMI) Jumper IN PE-A (MOV & AC EMI) Jumper OUT PE-A (MOV & AC EMI) Jumper OUT

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-A Power Jumper Configuration—Frame 7
The PE-A power jumper (connector P8) connects to J8 on the AC precharge

control circuit board (cat. no. 20-750-MACPC1-xx).
Figure 135 - Frame 7 PE-A Power Jumper Configurations

AC Precharge Control Circuit Board
PE-A Jumper IN
PE-A Jumper OUT

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-A1 Power Jumper Configuration—Frame 7
The PE-A1 power jumper is connected to the TVSS module (cat. no. 20-750-
MACP-xx-TVSS). The frame 7 AC precharge panel includes an insulated
spacer and hardware for the PE-A1 jumper OUT position and hardware for
the PE-A1 jumper IN position.
Figure 136 - Frame 7 PE-A1 Power Jumper Configurations
The TVSS Module is located on the back side of the

accessories components panel.
TVSS Module
PE-A1 Jumper IN PE-A1 Jumper OUT
M6 M6 x 10 mm
10 mm T25
10.2 N•m (90 lb•in) 5.9 N•m (52 lb•in)

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-A2 Power Jumper Configuration—Frame 7
The PE-A2 power jumper on frame 7 products is connected to the AC

common mode filter circuit board. A typical installation location is shown
here.
Figure 137 - Frame 7 PE-A2 Power Jumper Configurations
M6 x 10 mm
T30
5.9 N•m (52 lb•in)
PE-A2 Jumper IN
PE-A2 Jumper OUT

Chapter 5
Recommended DR Power Jumper Configuration—Frame 7
The DR jumper on frame 7 power modules is connected to the discharge

resistor on the DC bus conditioner.
Figure 138 - Frame 7 DR Power Jumper Configurations
DR Jumper IN
DR Jumper OUT
Power Module

Chapter 5
Power Jumper PowerFlex 755T products contain protective MOVs and common mode
capacitors. To guard against drive damage and operational problems, these
Configuration—Frames devices must be properly configured according to the tables in this section. To
8…15 connect or disconnect these devices, refer to the jumper configurations shown
in the figures on pages 265…267.
MOV, AC EMI Capacitor, and Common Mode Capacitor Circuits
The following power jumpers are discussed in this section.

• PE-A – MOV on the AC precharge circuit board
• PE-A1 – MOV on the TVSS module
• PE-A2 – Common mode capacitors on the AC common mode filter
circuit board
Note: The PE-A, PE-A1, and PE-A2 jumpers are not used with
PowerFlex 755TM common bus inverters.
• PE-B1 – Common mode capacitors on the line side and motor side
power interface circuit boards.
Figure 139 - MOV and AC EMI, Common Mode Capacitor, and DC Bus Conditioner Circuits
MOV and AC Common Mode Capacitor
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
1 1 1
PE-A PE-A1 PE-A2
DC Common Mode Capacitor

DC+
PE-B1 DC–
IMPORTANT The default power jumper settings are:

• PE-A, PE-A1, and PE-A2 power jumpers are installed in the connected
(IN) position.
• PE-A, PE-A1, and PE-A2 power jumpers are installed in the disconnected
(OUT) position when the bus conditioner for marine applications (-P51)
is selected.
• PE-B1 jumper is installed in the disconnected (OUT) position. If
necessary, reconfigure this jumper as determined by the power source
type available.

Chapter 5
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. The drive power source type
must be accurately determined. The power jumpers must be configured for
the power source type according to the recommendations in the PowerFlex
755T Input Product RF Emission Compliance and Installation Requirements
table on page 50.
ATTENTION: Hazard of equipment damage exists if jumpers are not properly
disconnected or are set differently between power and LCL filter modules.
Secure a disconnected jumper in the socket or on the insulated spacer that is
provided and verify that all modules are configured identically.
Table 37 - PowerFlex 755TL/TR Drive Jumpers

Grounding Scheme EMC PE-A PE-A1 PE-A2 PE-B1
Option
MOV on the AC Precharge MOV in the TVSS Module Common Mode Caps on Y-Caps on Line Side Y-Caps on Motor Side
Control Circuit Board All AC Common Mode Converter Power Inverter Power Interface
Filter Circuit Boards Interface Circuit Boards Circuit Boards
Factory Default C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
Grounded C2 (2) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
Ungrounded/High- — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
AC fed ungrounded
Impedance grounded
B phase ground
Marine Ungrounded / — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out)
Table 38 - PowerFlex 755TM Regenerative Bus Supplies Jumpers

Grounding Scheme EMC PE-A PE-A1 PE-A2 PE-B1
Option
MOV on the AC Precharge MOV in the TVSS Module Common Mode Caps on Y-Caps on Line Side Y-Caps on Motor Side
Control Circuit Board All AC Common Mode Converter Power Inverter Power Interface
Filter Circuit Boards Interface Circuit Boards Circuit Boards
Factory Default C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Disconnected (Out) —
Grounded C2 (2) Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Disconnected (Out) —
C3 Connected (In) Connected (In) Connected (In) Disconnected (Out) —
Ungrounded/High- — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) —
AC fed ungrounded
Impedance grounded
B phase ground
Marine Ungrounded / — Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) Disconnected (Out) —

Chapter 5
Table 39 - PowerFlex 755TM Common Bus Inverter Jumpers

Supply Source Type Grounding Scheme EMC Option PE-A PE-A1 PE-A2 PE-B1
MOV on the AC MOV in the TVSS Common Mode Y-Caps on Line Y-Caps on Motor
Precharge Control Module Caps on All AC Side Converter Side Inverter Power
Circuit Board Common Mode Power Interface Interface Circuit
Filter Circuit Circuit Boards Boards
Boards
Regenerative Factory Default C3 — — — — Disconnected (Out)
(2)
Grounded C2 — — — — Disconnected (Out)
C3 — — — — Disconnected (Out)
Ungrounded/High- — — — — — Disconnected (Out)
Marine Ungrounded / — — — — — Disconnected (Out)
High Resistance
Ground (1)
Non-Regenerative (third- Factory Default C3 — — — — Disconnected (Out)
party)
Grounded C2 (2) — — — — Disconnected (Out)
C3 — — — — Disconnected (Out)
Ungrounded/High- — — — — — Disconnected (Out)
Marine Ungrounded / — — — — — Disconnected (Out)
High Resistance
Ground (1)
(2) Full compliance requires an optional EMC solution that is mounted in a dedicated enclosure. Meets EN61800-3 Category C2 for conducted emissions.

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-A Jumper Configuration—Frame 8…15
The PE-A power jumper (connector P8) connects to J8 on the AC precharge

control circuit board (cat. no. 20-750-MACPC1-xx).
Figure 140 - Frame 7 PE-A Power Jumper Configurations

AC Precharge Control Circuit Board
PE-A Jumper IN
PE-A Jumper OUT

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-A1 Jumper Configuration—Frame 8…15
The PE-A1 power jumper is connected to the TVSS module (cat. no. 20-750-
MACP-xx-TVSS). Frame 8…15 AC precharge modules include an insulated
spacer and hardware for the PE-A1 jumper OUT position and hardware for
the PE-A1 jumper IN position.
Figure 141 - Frame 8…15 PE-A1 Power Jumper Configurations

Frame 10…15 Input Bay
TVSS Module
PE-A1 Jumper IN PE-A1 Jumper OUT

M6 M6 x 10 mm
10 mm T25
10.2 N•m (90 lb•in) 5.9 N•m (52 lb•in)

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-A2 Jumper Configuration—Frame 8…15
The PE-A2 power jumper on frame 8…15 products is connected to the AC

common mode filter circuit board in the LCL filter modules.
Figure 142 - Frame 8…15 PE-A2 Power Jumper Configurations
M6 x 20 mm
T45
5.2 N•m (46 lb•in)
PE-A2 Jumper IN
PE-A2 Jumper OUT
LCL Filter Module

Chapter 5
Recommended PE-B1 Jumper Configuration—Frame 8…15
The PE-B1 power jumper on frame 8…15 products is connected to the power
interface circuit board in the power modules.
Figure 143 - Frame 8…15 PE-B1 Power Jumper Configurations

Jumper is shown in the default installation location.
2
J5 (PE-B1 Jumper IN)
J6 (PE-B1 Jumper OUT)
Power Module
–
1 P2 or F - 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)
1.8 N•m (16 lb•in)
PE-B1 Power Jumper and Frame 7 Products
ATTENTION: A hazard of equipment damage exists. The PE-B1 power

jumper is not applicable to frame 7 power modules. Do not install a jumper
in either of the PE-B1 positions.

Chapter 5
Notes:

PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE Control Installation Instructions
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
Provides detailed information on:
PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE Control Technical Data, • Drive and bus supply specifications
publication 750-TD100 • Option specifications
• Fuse and circuit breaker ratings
• Kit selection
PowerFlex 755TM IP00 Open Type Kits Technical Data, publication 750-TD101 • Kit ratings and specifications
• Option specifications
PowerFlex 755TM IP00 Open Type Kits Installation Instructions, publication Provides instructions to install IP00 Open Type kits in user-supplied enclosures.
750-IN101
PowerFlex 750-Series I/O, Feedback, and Power Option Modules Installation, Provides instructions to install and wire 750-Series option modules.
publication 750-IN111
PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE Control Reference Manual, Provides detailed setup and programming instructions for common applications.
publication 750-RM100
PowerFlex Drives with TotalFORCE Control Programming Manual (firmware • I/O, control, and feedback options
revision 6.xxx and earlier), publication 750-PM100 • Parameters and programming
• Faults, alarms, and troubleshooting
PowerFlex Drives with TotalFORCE Control Programming Manual (firmware • I/O, control, and feedback options
revision 10.xxx and later), publication 750-PM101 • Parameters and programming
• Faults, alarms, and troubleshooting
Provides basic information to properly wire and ground the following products in common
bus applications:
Drives in Common Bus Configurations with PowerFlex 755TM Bus Supplies • PowerFlex 755TM drive system for common bus solutions
Application Techniques, publication DRIVES-AT005 • PowerFlex 750-Series AC and DC input drives
• Kinetix® 5700 servo drives
Provides guidance on how to tune Flux Vector position and velocity loops, filters, and other
PowerFlex 755T Flux Vector Tuning, publication 750-AT006 features to achieve the level of performance that is required for a given application. This
publication is intended for novice drives users and users with advanced skills.
PowerFlex Drives with TotalFORCE Control Built-in EtherNet/IP Adapter User Provides information on how to install, configure, and troubleshoot applications for the
Manual, publication 750COM-UM009 PowerFlex drives with the built-in EtherNet/IP™ adapter.
PowerFlex 750-Series Products with TotalFORCE Control Hardware Service • Preventive maintenance
Manual, publication 750-TG100 • Component testing
• Hardware replacement procedures
PowerFlex 750-Series Safe Speed Monitor Option Module Safety Reference
Manual, publication 750-RM001
PowerFlex 750-Series Safe Torque Off Option Module User Manual, publication
750-UM002 These publications provide detailed information on installation, set-up, and operation of the
750-Series safety option modules.
PowerFlex 750-Series ATEX Option Module User Manual, publication 750-UM003
PowerFlex 755 Integrated Safety - Safe Torque Off Option Module User Manual,
publication 750-UM004
PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 / -C6S HIM (Human Interface Module) User Manual, Provides detailed information on HIM components, operation, and features.
20HIM-UM001
PowerFlex 755TM AC Precharge Modules Unpacking and Lifting Instructions,
publication 750-IN102 These publications provide detailed information on:
• Component weights
PowerFlex 755TM DC Precharge Modules Unpacking and Lifting Instructions, • Precautions and recommendations
publication 750-IN103 • Hardware attachment points
PowerFlex 755TM Power and Filter Modules Unpacking and Lifting Instructions, • Lifting the component out of the packaging
Provides detailed set-up and operating instructions for the module service cart and DC
PowerFlex 750-Series Service Cart Instructions, publication 750-IN105 precharge module lift.
PowerFlex 755TM Power and Filter Module Storage Hardware Instructions, Provides detailed installation and usage instructions for this hardware accessory.
PowerFlex 755T Module Service Ramp Instructions, publication 750-IN108 Provides detailed usage instructions for the module service ramp.
Provides basic information on enclosure systems, considerations to help protect against
Industry Installation Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, environmental contaminants, and power and grounding considerations for installing Pulse
publication DRIVES-AT003 Width Modulated (PWM) AC drives.
Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - February 2021 269

Resource Description
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, Provides basic information to properly wire and ground PWM AC drives.
publication DRIVES-IN001
Describes how to configure and use EtherNet/IP devices to communicate on the EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP Network Devices User Manual, ENET-UM006 network.
Ethernet Reference Manual, ENET-RM002 Describes basic Ethernet concepts, infrastructure components, and infrastructure features.
Provides guidance on how to conduct security assessments, implement Rockwell
System Security Design Guidelines Reference Manual, SECURE-RM001 Automation products in a secure system, harden the control system, manage user access,
and dispose of equipment.
Industrial Components Preventive Maintenance, Enclosures, and Contact Ratings Provides a quick reference tool for Allen-Bradley industrial automation controls and
Specifications, publication IC-TD002 assemblies.
Designed to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987 and provides
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-State general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in
Control, publication SGI-1.1 the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid-state
components.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications. Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.
270 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - February 2021

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - February 2021 271

Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, and product notification updates. rok.auto/support
Knowledgebase Access Knowledgebase articles. rok.auto/knowledgebase
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Get help determining how products interact, check features and capabilities, and find rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) associated firmware.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete
the form at rok.auto/docfeedback.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at rok.auto/pec.
Allen-Bradley, Connected Components Workbench, DPI, expanding human possibility, Logix, PowerFlex, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLogix 5000, SCANPort, Studio 5000, and TotalFORCE
are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
EtherNet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenkÖy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE YÖnetmeliğine Uygundur
Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - February 2021

Supersedes Publication 750-IN100E-EN-P - June 2020 Copyright © 2021 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Powerflex Drives With Totalforce Control: Installation Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powerflex Drives With Totalforce Control: Installation Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerFlex Drives with

Installation Instructions Original Instructions

Important User Information

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

2 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 3

Safety Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

This manual provides instructions for an initial product installation. Assembly

This manual is intended for two types of personnel:

The Additional Resources section is a directory of Rockwell Automation

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 5

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

PowerFlex® 750-Series products with TotalFORCE® control are Architecture

In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series products with

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 7

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

Class 1 Light-emitting Diode Product

ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, the installer must provide

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 9

20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 11

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

20J 1 F 3 C 1K6 L N A N N N N N -C1-P16…

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 13

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

20G 1 D 3 F 2K3 M N D N N N N N -C0-C11-P15…

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 15

Catalog number positions 11…13 identify additional product configuration.

20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

Catalog number positions 14…18 are not used.

20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

20G 1 G 3 D 740 L N A N N N N N -C0-P15…

20G Control Options Selection

20J Control Options Selection

20G Power Options Selection

20J Power Options Selection

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 17

1 2 Drive Code 1 – Cat. No. Position 6 2 – Cat. No. Positions 7…10

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

PowerFlex 755TR Drives

Power LD/ND/HD xxx/xxx/xxx kW xxx/xxx/xxx HP

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 19

PowerFlex 755TM Bus Supplies

SECTION 1 OF 9 20J C585 D617 E395 F370

Floor Mount Bus Supply (Typical)

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

PowerFlex 755TM Common Bus Inverters

SECTION 1 OF 3 20G 9 9 C920 D800 E595 F565

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 21

Commonly Used Tools Installation Tools

Tool Description Details

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021

Configuration Tool Options

Any of the following configuration tools can be used:

Hexagonal nut or standoff

Slotted torx screw

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-IN100F-EN-P - March 2021 23

Fastener Torque Sequences